JP2019201751A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly amusing performance.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 can execute a plurality of reliability-suggestive performances for suggesting reliability to a jackpot. The reliability-suggestive performance includes for example a performance executable during display of a decorative performance in a first mode and a performance executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a first mode are, for example, a retention icon change performance, an icon change performance concerned, a pseudo continuation performance, an operation promotion performance, a background performance, a chance pattern performance, a pattern change performance, and the like. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode are, for example, an icon change performance concerned, a title indication, an operation promotion performance, a cut-in, and the like.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing an effect based on a determination as to whether or not to execute a special game.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at a predetermined starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player. Some of these types of gaming machines can execute a notice effect (for example, a premier effect) for notifying that a jackpot game will be executed prior to notifying that it has been determined that the jackpot game will be executed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-96091

  By the way, the production performed in the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily highly interesting, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly interesting performance.

The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And an effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means displays a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information, and the special game is executed at any one of a plurality of timings. A notice effect that suggests the possibility of being displayed can be executed. The notice effect includes a first notice effect that is executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode, and the corresponding display is in a special mode. And a second notice effect that is sometimes executed, and it is possible to execute a common effect that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode, and before the start of the common effect, Perform notice effect An ability can execute the second informational display after the start of the common effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect with high interest.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 A plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the gaming machine 1 is provided. Explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination Flow chart illustrating the flow of performance in the normal gaming state Flow chart illustrating the flow of production in the probabilistic gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decorativeness of a decorative pattern A screen diagram showing a specific example of production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 2) Time chart showing a specific example of the display pattern of the decorative symbol when the promotion effect is executed Screen view showing a specific example of character SP reach A screen diagram showing a specific example of the bumping effect in the normal gaming state A screen showing a specific example of battle reach in the probabilistic gaming state Screen diagram showing a specific example of a bumping effect in a probabilistic gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern selection table used for the process which selects the fluctuation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variation pattern selection table used for the process which selects the variation pattern of a special symbol in a probability variation game state. Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot notices A screen showing a specific example of a premier character production Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow title display Screen diagram showing specific examples of blue title display and red title display Screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow character display Screen diagram showing a specific example of cut-in performed according to the operation Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one notification Screen shot illustrating how the premier character production is performed multiple times within the same variation Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table Time chart showing specific examples of effects in the normal gaming state Time chart showing specific examples of effects in the probabilistic gaming state Explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the hold icon Screen diagram illustrating a customer waiting menu screen Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set Block diagram illustrating the configuration of main RAM 103 and various information stored in main RAM 103 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 36 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS. Detailed flowchart of special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 in FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the game state setting process performed at the time of completion | finish of a jackpot game in the game control board 100 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 46 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 in FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the change effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the reliability suggesting effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S41 of FIG. A screen showing a specific example of the first mission effect Screen view showing a specific example of the second mission effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table used for the process which selects the fluctuation | variation pattern of a special symbol at the time of a normal game state in 2nd Embodiment. Time chart showing a specific example of the period in which the hold icon change effect can be executed and the period in which it cannot be executed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the icon at the time of jackpot Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the icon at the time of losing Time chart showing specific examples of the period during which the icon change effect can be executed and the period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a series of effects in a pseudo-continuous effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the number of executions of pseudo-continuous production and reliability Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a series of effects when a background effect is performed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the operation promotion effect performed just before the start of a background effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect performed just before the start of the background effect at the time of the big hit Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect performed just before the start of a background effect at the time of a loss Time chart for explaining the chance eye effect and symbol change effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between reliability suggestion effects Screen diagram illustrating a situation in which the background effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A The screen figure which illustrates a mode that the icon change production (a jackpot notice), the background production, and the normal pseudo-continuous production are executed in the normal mode A Screen diagram illustrating a state in which the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A The screen figure which illustrates a mode that the icon change production (a jackpot notice), the background production, and the normal pseudo-continuous production are executed in the normal mode A Screen diagram illustrating the appearance of the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect in the normal mode A Screen diagram illustrating a state in which the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of SPSP reach (battle production) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the additional display displayed by adding to the number which comprises a decorative design Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the decoration design of a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Schematic configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a game board 2 provided with a prize and a character relating to determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper plate 28 are guided to a launching device (not shown), and the game is performed with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. The game area 10 falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are dropped into a box (not shown) arranged below the lower plate 29. In addition, the upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be configured by a single plate.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a prize and a winning combination. It has been. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip are used as a prize and a winning combination. 17 is provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. May win. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start port 11 is a start region that is always open, and the second start port 12 is a start region that is opened only when the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins a prize through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins a prize through the second start port 12, a big hit game (special game) advantageous to the player is played. It is determined whether or not to execute, and a symbol indicating the determination result is displayed on a first special symbol display 41 or a second special symbol display 42 of the display 4 described later. And when the symbol which shows a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game which opens the big winning opening 13 is performed.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big jackpot” is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the above-mentioned plate is operated to open the jackpot 13. Is executed. During the big hit game, the big prize opening until a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, eight game balls won in the big prize opening 13 or 29.5 seconds have passed since the big prize opening 13 was opened) is satisfied. A long open round game that is closed after 13 is maintained in the open state is executed a predetermined number of times at predetermined time intervals.

  In this way, since the big prize opening 13 is opened long during the jackpot game, the player can make more awards by making a right strike during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not being played. You can get a sphere.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1), and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). The posture can be changed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second start port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily passed by the operation of the electric tulip 17. Become.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

[Example of configuration of rendering means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, an effect accessory 7, a panel lamp 25, and the like for performing various effects. Further, the frame member 3 incorporates a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) not shown in FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. On this liquid crystal screen 5, for example, decorative symbols, characters and items for notifying the determination result of special symbol determination, a reserved image (holding icon) displayed as many as the number of special symbol determinations being held, and a special symbol variation display An effect image including various display objects such as the icon indicating that the icon is in the middle is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting music, sound, sound effects, etc. in synchronism with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 5 or asynchronously.

  The director 7 is disposed in front of and on the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. The effect accessory 7 incorporates a light emitting element (for example, LED). The effect character 7 performs a predetermined effect by both or one of the movement and light of the character itself. In the present embodiment, the director 7 is formed in a shape imitating a sword, and an initial posture in which the sword appears to be almost upright with the sword handle (lower end) as the center of rotation (FIG. 1). Reference) and a rotation posture (see FIG. 11A) that makes the sword appear to be substantially horizontal.

  The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color.

[Input means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation, a cursor movement, and the like, and is configured to have an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 may be performed. In addition, the gaming machine 1 can perform volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, setting change of appearance rate of a predetermined effect, and the like by operating the effect button 26 and the effect key 27, and these are based on FIG. The details will be described later.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first A special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game state indicator 47, a round indicator 48 and the like are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby determining the first special symbol determination. Inform the results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby determining the second special symbol determination. Inform the results. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, as a symbol indicating the determination result, a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, or a determination result of the special symbol determination The losing symbol indicating that “is losing” is stopped and displayed.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, both of the upper limits of the number of reservations are set to “4”.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round indicator 48 displays the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 during the jackpot game (the round which is the number of round games). Number).

  In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 are referred to as “special symbols”, and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 are “normal symbols”. Shall be called. Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called “first special symbol”, the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called “second special symbol”, and both of them are called. It may be distinguished.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 controls the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game, such as various determinations and command transmission, and the effects based on the commands received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 that controls the effects of images and sounds, an image sound control board 140 that controls effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls effects by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured as one board.

[Configuration Example of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a first gate switch 114, a second gate switch 115, a big winning port switch 116, and a big winning port control unit. 117, the normal winning a prize opening switch 118, and each indicator 41-48 which comprises the indicator 4 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes four ordinary winning opening switches 122 corresponding to the four ordinary winning openings 14 (see FIG. 1). In FIG. Only the notation.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving. To do. The first gate switch 114 detects the passage of the game ball with respect to the first gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second gate switch 115 detects the passage of the game ball with respect to the second gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The big prize opening switch 116 detects the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. Based on a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 117 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so that the drive transmission is possible. To do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  When a detection signal is input from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118, the main CPU 101 receives a predetermined number corresponding to the place where the game ball has won. The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out the prize balls, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board. Although a detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies a game ball to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out the game ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. .

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Also, various random numbers are acquired as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, the various random numbers are jackpot random numbers, design random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers.

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds of the jackpot game or the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, first, based on whether or not the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. judge. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the jackpot type is determined based on which random number value of the predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102 matches the acquired symbol random number. Here, the types of jackpots include, for example, “probability jackpot” in which the game is controlled in the probability change gaming state after the jackpot game is ended, or the game is controlled in the short time gaming state after the jackpot game is ended. An example is the “normal jackpot”. The gaming state and the type of jackpot will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not executed in the determination based on the jackpot random number, based on whether or not the acquired reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. Further, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is performed. As a result, the variation time of the special symbol is determined.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 101 controls the opening / closing of the jackpot 13 through the jackpot control unit 117, so that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type is controlled. Execute.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first gate switch 114 or the second gate switch 115 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is temporarily open | released by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control part 113. FIG.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes each of the display devices 41 to 48 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, and a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

  The sub CPU 131 sets the production contents based on game information related to special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, and the like transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Configuration Example of Image Sound Control Board 140]
The image / acoustic control board 140 includes an overall CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, a signal output unit 147 (not shown), and the like. ing. Based on the program stored in the control ROM 142, the overall CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image or sound that realizes an effect whose effect content is set on the effect control board 130. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, and a work area for data processing.

  The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The overall CPU 141 generates a control signal based on a command from the effect control board 130 and a program stored in the control ROM 142 and outputs the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145 to control these operations.

  Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 displays an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating the effect image, a drawing engine for executing the rendering process of the effect image, and an effect image drawn by the drawing engine on a liquid crystal display. An output circuit for outputting to the device 5 is provided. The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the overall CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

  Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as a working ROM for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145 and an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data related to effect sounds such as music, voice, and sound effects. SDRAM is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

  The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the overall CPU 141 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second interval) for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). For example, the signal output unit 147 may output a predetermined signal at a constant time interval. The overall CPU 141 executes different processing depending on whether a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147 and when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs a calculation process when controlling the operations of the effect actor 7, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, and a work area for data processing.

  The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating each light emission pattern of the light emitting element, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like built in the effect actor 7. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the effect actor 7 or the like.

  The lamp CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and the light emitting element of the effect agent 7, the panel lamp 25, The light emission of the frame lamp 37 is controlled. The lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153 and drives the motor that operates the effect agent 7. To control.

  In addition, when the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 are operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command for notifying the effect to the effect control board 130.

[Variation production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but here, it is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. An outline of the fluctuating effects will be given.

  In the gaming machine 1, the first special symbol determination is executed when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, and the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Stopped display. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a variation effect including a variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol (for example, see FIG. 10). Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed for the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (see, for example, FIG. 11H). In this way, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the decorative symbol are synchronized. In addition, the decorative symbol starts to be displayed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and is stopped to be displayed in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol. Synchronized display of decorative symbols. In other words, the decorative symbol is a display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding display”).

  During such a variable display of symbols, a so-called reach effect may be performed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a part of a decorative design symbol row in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction. When the variation display of the first special symbol is started, these symbol sequences are variably displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom (see, for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B). On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed, before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the left and right column decorative symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are completely displayed. Make a pseudo stop so as not to stop. In addition, the pseudo stop is an effect in which the decorative symbol is slightly moved on the spot without moving the decorative symbol, and in the following description, the actual stop (which may be simply referred to as “stop display”) that completely stops the decorative symbol. When distinguishing, it may call a pseudo stop.

  When the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, if the same decorative symbol on the active line as these symbols is pseudo-stopped, reach will be established, and the combination that shows a jackpot (for example, the same ornament such as “333” or “777”) A reach effect is made to make the player feel a sense of expectation that the decorative symbol will be pseudo-stopped (and the actual stop) at three rounds of symbols). This reach production is performed by the player with the decorative symbols constituting the middle symbol row in a state where the same decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “reach symbols”) that are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped. This is an effect of scrolling at a low speed so as to be discernable, and finally notifying the winning symbol by stopping the middle symbol common to the reach symbol or the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the effective line.

  In addition to the decorative design, other effect images such as characters and items may be used for the reach effect (see FIG. 10G). Further, in the following description, in the symbol variation in which the reach effect is performed, the effect that is performed until the reach is established may be referred to as “pre-reach effect”. The pre-reach effect and the reach effect are a case where the decorative pattern is pseudo-stopped (and the main stop) in a combination mode showing a jackpot, and a case where the main stop is other than a combination mode showing a jackpot (that is, a combination mode showing a loss) It is an effect that can be executed in both.

  The reach effect will be described in detail later. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”, the loss is notified so that the loss is notified when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Three decorative symbols stop in the combination mode shown. For example, when a reach effect is performed, three decorative symbols indicating reach lose eyes (for example, “343”)) are temporarily stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the broken eyes (for example, “154”) are stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Thus, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not to be executed, the lose notification effect of notifying that the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a loss and then making a real stop to notify the player of the fact that the jackpot game is not executed. Executed.

  When this lose notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are immediately started. .

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the reach effect is usually executed during the variation display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Then, after the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing a big hit (for example, a doublet such as “333” or “777”), the main stop is made. As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the hit notification effect for notifying the jackpot (that the jackpot game is executed) by falsely stopping the three decorative symbols in a manner showing the jackpot and then making a real stop is provided. Executed. When the hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed.

[About icons]
During special symbol fluctuation display or jackpot game, even if a game ball wins at the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special symbol determination or symbol variation display is immediately triggered by this winning. It cannot be executed. For this reason, the gaming machine 1 immediately displays the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) and the symbol variation display even if a game ball wins the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). If it cannot be executed, the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is suspended within a range not exceeding a predetermined number (“4” in the present embodiment), and the number of reserves is displayed as the first special symbol hold display. Displayed on the display 43 (or the second special symbol hold display 44).

  On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, as a display area in which a hold icon, which is an effect image suggesting that special symbol determination and symbol variation display are put on hold, a first hold icon display area 51 and A second hold icon display area 52 is provided (see FIG. 1).

  The first hold icon display area 51 is an area in which a hold icon suggesting that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the first hold icon display area 51, the same number of hold icons as the number of hold for the first special symbol determination shown by the first special symbol hold indicator 43 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

  The second hold icon display area 52 is an area where a hold icon suggesting that the second special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the second hold icon display area 52, the same number of hold icons as the number of hold for the second special symbol determination shown by the second special symbol hold indicator 44 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

  In FIG. 1, three hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 to indicate that the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is “3”, and the second special symbol determination is performed. In order to suggest that the number of holds is “2”, a state in which two hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is illustrated.

  The liquid crystal screen 5 includes a region 53 as a display region for displaying a variation suggestion image (hereinafter referred to as “the icon”) that suggests that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. Provided (see FIG. 1).

  In the gaming machine 1, when the change display of the symbol is started to digest the right of the first special symbol determination being held, the first display among the hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is performed. The held icon (hold icon closest to the area 53) is moved from the first hold icon display area 51 to the area 53 and displayed as the icon. When another hold icon is displayed in the first hold display area 51, the other hold icon is shifted to the area 53 side in the first hold icon display area 51.

  Note that such a shift process is similarly performed for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. The icon is an image that is displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol being executed. In addition, since the hold icon is during the special symbol fluctuation display (or before a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the special symbol stop display), the right to determine the special symbol being held is held. It is an image which notifies that it is in a state that cannot be digested immediately. For this reason, the hold icon is an image displayed in response to the special symbol being variably displayed, and can be said to be a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. . For this reason, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is prioritized over the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51.

  A first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is performed based on acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). Before, the hold icon corresponding to the acquired information is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 (or the second hold icon display area 52). When the special symbol determination and the special symbol variation display are performed based on the acquired information corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 (or the second hold icon display area 52), The hold icon moves to the area 53 and is displayed in the area 53 as the icon that suggests that the special symbol is variably displayed.

  In the first hold icon display area 51, for example, a normal icon or a special icon is displayed. Here, the normal icon is a default hold icon, for example, a white hold icon. The special icon is a hold icon that suggests the jackpot reliability and corresponds to a hold icon displayed in a color other than white. When the special icons in the present embodiment are arranged in order from the suggested low hit reliability to the highest, the blue hold icon (blue hold), the green hold icon (green hold), and the red hold icon (red hold) , Gold hold icon (gold hold), rainbow hold icon (rainbow hold), and the jackpot reliability is 5%, 15%, 50%, 75%, 100% (see FIG. 32). ).

  The display state of the normal icon may not change until the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon is digested, that is, until the normal icon moves to the area 53 and is deleted from the area 53. . Moreover, when a hold icon is displayed in the 1st hold icon display area 51, for example, it may be displayed as a special icon from the beginning. Further, for example, when the normal icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 changes to a special icon in the first hold icon display area 51 or the area 53, for example, it is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. In some cases, the special icon changes to the upper special icon in the first hold icon display area 51 or the area 53 one or more times. In the following description, an effect that displays a special icon as a hold icon and suggests a jackpot reliability is referred to as a “prior effect”.

  In the second hold icon display area 52, a normal icon and a special icon are displayed as in the first hold icon display area 51. For this reason, the description regarding the hold icon displayed in the 2nd hold icon display area 52 is abbreviate | omitted.

[About gaming state]
Hereinafter, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming state. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in any one of the three gaming states of “normal gaming state”, “probability changing gaming state”, and “time-saving gaming state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state in which it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the electric chew support function is not provided. In other words, in the normal gaming state, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200) (see FIG. 6A). Also, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12), and the normal symbol variation time is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time).

  The “probability game state” is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state in which it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/50) (see FIG. 6A). In addition, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

  The “time-short game state” is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the low probability state described above and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the short-time gaming state, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, about 1/200). In addition, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

  Comparing each gaming state with respect to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol in the “probable gaming state” and “short-time gaming state” is relatively short compared to the variation time of the special symbol in the “normal gaming state” Easy to set to time.

  In addition, the probability determined to execute the special game (big hit probability), the probability determined to open the second start port 12 (winning probability of the normal symbol determination), and the variation of the normal symbol shown in the description of each gaming state Needless to say, the time and the opening time of the second start port 12 are merely examples, and other probabilities and times may be used.

  In the following description, a state in which a game ball is easily won at the second starting port 12 due to the addition of the electric chew support function is referred to as a “high base state”, and the electric chew support function is provided. A state in which it is not easy to win a game ball in the second starting port 12 due to the absence of the game is referred to as a “low base state”.

  The game ball hit by the player to the right can win the second starting port 12 without winning the first starting port 11. However, in the low base state, the second start port 12 is difficult to be opened, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. For this reason, when the game is controlled in a low base state (in this embodiment, “normal game state” corresponds to this), the player performs a game by left-handed aiming at the first start port 11. Become.

  When the game ball left-handed in the normal gaming state wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and the first special symbol determination result is displayed after the first special symbol is variably displayed. As the first special symbol to be shown, the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, when the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol indicating “probable bonus jackpot” is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game for performing a predetermined number of long open round games according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, The game is controlled in the probability variation game state. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a probability variation loop type, and after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation gaming state basically continues until the next jackpot.

  Note that when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the second starting port 12 is more likely to win the game ball than the first starting port 11. . For this reason, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by right-handed aiming at the second starting port 12. This is the same when the game is controlled in the short-time gaming state, and basically, the second special symbol determination is performed in the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state.

  When the jackpot symbol indicating “probability jackpot” is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the game is controlled again in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and “normal jackpot” is selected as the second special symbol. When the jackpot symbol shown is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled in the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, when the big hit symbol indicating “normal big hit” is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the big hit game in which a long-open round game of a predetermined number of times according to the big hit symbol is executed is executed, and the big hit game After completion, the game is controlled in the short-time game state. At this time, if the special symbol determination (basically, the second special symbol determination) is performed 50 times (an example of the prescribed number of times in FIG. 5) in the short game state, Shifts from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  In the short-time gaming state, when the jackpot symbol indicating “probable bonus jackpot” is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the second special symbol determination within 50 times, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol is displayed. After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state. In addition, when the big jackpot symbol indicating “normal jackpot” is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, after the jackpot game including the predetermined number of long open round games corresponding to the jackpot symbol is finished, the game is again set to the short-time game state. The game will be controlled.

  As is apparent from the description so far, the main CPU 101 can control the game in any one of the three game states of the normal game state, the probability variation game state, and the short-time game state. Note that after the jackpot game is executed, the game can be controlled in one of two game states, a probability variation game state and a short-time game state.

  In another embodiment, for example, a new jackpot is provided in which a game is controlled in the normal gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and after the jackpot game is finished, the probability variation gaming state, the short-time gaming state, and the normal gaming state are provided. A configuration in which a game can be controlled in any one of the gaming states may be employed.

[Special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, the special symbol determination using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol determination.

  The jackpot random number illustrated in FIG. 6A is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S309 in FIG. 41) as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and has a probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game. It is set individually for each of a relatively low low-probability state and a high-probability state in which it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed.

  In this embodiment, regarding the low probability state, two winning values of “0” and “1” are stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 acquires the game when the game is controlled in the low probability state. When the jackpot random number matches one of these two winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. Further, regarding the high probability state, in the present embodiment, eight winning values “0” to “7” are stored in the main ROM 102, and the jackpot random number acquired when the game is controlled in the high probability state. When it matches with any of these 8 winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed.

  Note that the range that the jackpot random number can take is “0” to “399” in this embodiment in both the low probability state and the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/200 (= 2/400), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50 (= 8/400). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is likely to be a big hit four times in the high probability state compared to the low probability state.

  If the main CPU 101 determines to execute the jackpot game, which random number value among the random numbers set in advance for each jackpot type matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination? Based on the, determine the type of jackpot.

  For example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by a hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when a setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game control board 100 is operated (for example, pressed) when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a setting value related to the jackpot probability is predetermined. (For example, any value from “1” to “3”). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

  For example, the larger the set value, the easier the jackpot, and the ratio between the jackpot probability in the high probability state and the jackpot probability in the low probability state may be fixed regardless of the set value. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 1/220 when the set value is “1”, is set to 1/200 when the set value is “2”, and the set value is “ When it is “3”, it is set to 1/180. The jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1 / 27.5 (= 1/220 × 8 times) when the set value is “1”, and when the set value is “2”. 1/25 (= 1/200 × 8 times) is set, and when the set value is “3”, 1 / 22.5 (= 1/180 × 8 times) is set.

(Type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, three types of jackpots for the first start opening winning are prepared: “16R probability variation jackpot”, “6R probability variation jackpot”, and “6R normal jackpot”. Has been. Here, the “16R probability variation jackpot” (16R probability variation jackpot) (16R probability variation jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game having 16 long open round games is executed. The “6R probability variation jackpot” (6R probability variation jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game in which six long open round games are executed. “6R normal jackpot” (6R normal jackpot) is a jackpot in which a game is controlled in a short-time gaming state after a jackpot game in which six long open round games are executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the jackpot type is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 10 random values of “0” to “9” are stored for 16R probability variation, 110 random values of “10” to “119” are stored for 6R probability variation, and 6R In contrast, 80 random numbers “120” to “199” are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the range that the design random number can take is set to “0” to “199”. For this reason, if it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit according to the first start opening prize, the ratio that the jackpot type is determined to be 16R probability variation is 5% (= 10/200 × 100), and the jackpot type is determined to be 6R probability variation. The ratio to be determined is 55% (= 110/200 × 100), and the ratio at which the jackpot type is normally determined as 6R is 40% (= 80/200 × 100).

  Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the ratio of the jackpot symbol X1 indicating 16R probability variation as the first special symbol is 5% stopped, and the jackpot symbol X2 indicating 6R probability variation is The ratio of the stop display is 55%, and the ratio of the jackpot symbol X3 indicating 6R normal display is 40%.

  In addition, when these three types of jackpots are compared with the number of prize balls that a player can acquire, the following can be said. That is, for example, when it is assumed that 15 game balls are paid out every time a game ball is won in the grand prize winning opening 13 and 8 game balls are won, one long open round game is completed. With certainty, the player can win 1920 (= 15 × 8 × 16) prize balls. Further, under the same assumption, the player can obtain 720 (= 15 × 8 × 6) prize balls in 6R normal and 6R probability variation.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots for the second start opening winning are “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “4R probability variation jackpot”, “8R normal jackpot” 4 types are prepared. Here, the jackpot game that is performed when “16R probability variation jackpot” (16R probability variation) and the subsequent gaming state are the same as when the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, “8R probability variation jackpot” (8R probability variation jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game in which eight long-open round games are executed. “4R probability variation jackpot” (4R probability variation jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game in which four long open round games are executed. “8R normal jackpot” (8R normal jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game in which eight long-open round games are executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, a random value for determining the type of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 80 random numbers from “0” to “79” are stored for 16R probability variation, and 20 random values from “80” to “99” are stored for 8R probability variation, and 4R. Twenty random numbers “110” to “119” are stored for the probability variation, and 80 random numbers “120” to “199” are stored for the 8R normal.

  Here, in this embodiment, the range that the symbol random number related to the second special symbol determination can take is common to the range that the symbol random number related to the second special symbol determination can take. For this reason, when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the second starting opening prize, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to 16R probability variation is 40% (= 80/200 × 100), and the jackpot type is determined to be 8R probability variation. The ratio determined is 10% (= 20/200 × 100), the type of jackpot is determined to be 4R probability variation, the ratio is also 10% (= 20/200 × 100), and the type of jackpot is 8R normally The ratio determined to be 40% (= 80/200 × 100).

  For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the ratio of the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating 16R probability variation as the second special symbol is 40% stopped, and the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating 8R probability variation is The ratio of the stop display is 10%, the ratio of the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating 4R probability change is 10%, and the ratio of the jackpot symbol Y4 indicating the normal 8R is 40%.

  When these four types of jackpots are compared by the number of prize balls that a player can acquire, the following can be said. That is, for example, when it is assumed that 15 game balls are paid out every time a game ball is won in the grand prize winning opening 13 and 8 game balls are won, one long open round game is completed. In the probability change, as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed, the player can acquire 1920 (= 15 × 8 × 16) prize balls. Further, under the same assumption, a player can acquire 960 (= 15 × 8 × 8) prize balls in 8R probability variation and 8R normal. In the 4R probability variation, the player can obtain 480 (= 15 × 8 × 4) prize balls.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has 4R jackpot games in which the player can win 480 prize balls and 6R jackpots in which the player can win 720 prize balls. It is possible to execute a game, an 8R jackpot game in which the player can win 960 prize balls, and a 16R jackpot game in which the player can win 1920 prize balls.

  In the present embodiment, odd symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, 7 symbols, 9 symbols) whose numbers constituting the decorative symbols are green odd numbers function as probability variation symbols. Further, even symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols) whose numbers constituting the decorative symbols are even numbers of blue function as normal symbols. The 7 symbols are used for the notification effect only when the 16R probability changes. For this reason, in the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, when the jackpot symbol X1, Y1 corresponding to the 16R probability variation is stopped, the three decorative symbols indicating “777” double-stopped are stopped and other probability variation big hits are made. When the jackpot symbol X2, Y2, Y3 corresponding to is stopped, three decorative symbols showing odd-numbered symbols that are different from seven symbols such as “111”, “333”, “555”, and “999” Stops this time. Also, when the jackpot symbol X3, Y4 corresponding to the 6R normal or 8R normal stops, the three decorative symbols indicating the even-numbered doublet stop stop.

  Note that the type of jackpot is not limited to that described above, and may be any mode as long as the player can be in an advantageous state according to the determination result of the special symbol determination. For example, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol X1, Y1 is 10 long open round games (for example, the player can win 1500 (= 15 × 8 × 10) prize balls) and immediately after the jackpot game ends Alternatively, a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a probable gaming state may be used.

[Flow of performance in normal gaming state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, an effect that is performed after the first special symbol variation display is started until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The flow will be described. Here, FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of effects in the normal gaming state.

  As described above, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player makes a left strike aiming to win a game ball at the first start port 11. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination when a game ball wins the first start port 11. In the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in addition to the processing for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on FIG. 6 and the processing for determining the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. Processing is included, and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives a change start command including information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the panel lamp 25, A production pattern of production performed using various production means such as the frame lamp 37 and the production bonus 7 is set. Then, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing an effect based on this setting.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 7A). Here, when it is determined at the start of symbol variation that the effect without reach is performed, for example, the effect without reach is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol do not form a reach (see FIG. 7B). ). Examples of this non-reach effect include an effect in which two symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, and a symbol in which five symbols are pseudo-stopped as a right symbol, and an effect in which six symbols as a left symbol and four symbols as a right symbol are simultaneously pseudo-stopped. Can be mentioned. When this reach-less effect is performed, a loss notification effect is usually performed in which the three decorative symbols indicating the broken eyes are stopped in a pseudo manner and then stopped (see FIG. 7C). In this embodiment, except for the point where reach is not established, the same (or similar) effect as the pre-reach effect is executed as the non-reach effect. For this reason, it is determined whether or not the non-reach effect is being executed or the pre-reach effect is being executed until it is indicated that there is no possibility that reach will be established in this variable display when the decorative symbol is completely stopped. Cannot distinguish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at the start of symbol variation that the effect with reach is performed, for example, the decorative symbols that are common to each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 7D). A normal reach production (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal reach”) is performed (see FIG. 7E). The normal reach effect is a reach effect that increases the player's expectation that the same middle symbol as the reach symbol stops on the effective line connecting the two reach symbols (see FIG. 10D). When this normal reach is performed, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row that has been scroll-displayed at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when reach is established with 3 symbols (see FIG. 10C), when 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped on the active line as a middle symbol, and then stop with 2 reach symbols, “333” And the jackpot is notified (see FIG. 7H). On the other hand, when the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the active line is pseudo-stopped and then the main symbol is stopped together with the two reach symbols, for example, the reach loss eye such as “343” is stopped and notified of the loss (see FIG. 7 (C)).

  On the other hand, if the scroll display in the middle row is continued even after the same decorative design as the reach design passes through the active line, the reach design from the normal reach to the character SP reach production (hereinafter referred to as “character SP reach”). Will develop (see FIG. 7F). This character SP reach is a reach production with a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. In the character SP reach in the present embodiment, the following effects are performed. In other words, when the character SP reach is developed, although not shown in the figure, the title display relating to the character SP reach that displays a message such as “Take back the treasure chest from the enemy!” Is performed. Then, a struggle effect is shown that shows a situation where one's own character (hereinafter referred to as “own character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”) compete for the treasure chest (FIG. 7 (F-1)). 13 (A)).

  As a result effect of the contention effect, a contention failure effect (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) or a contention success effect (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is performed. Here, the contention failure effect is configured, for example, as an effect display indicating a situation where the contention is lost due to the contention with the enemy character (see FIG. 13B). When this capture failure effect is executed, the development suggestion effect (FIG. 7 (F)) suggests that the character SP reach as the pre-stage effect will develop into the SPSP reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as “SPSP reach”) as the post-stage effect. -4)), or a non-development suggesting effect (see FIG. 7 (F-3)) suggesting that the character SP reach does not develop into the SPSP reach. This non-development suggestion effect is configured as, for example, an effect display that represents the appearance of the enemy character who has taken away the treasure box escaping (see FIG. 13C). When this non-development suggestion effect is performed, there is no possibility that the jackpot will be notified, and the loss is notified when the reach lose eye (for example, “343”) is temporarily stopped after the false stop (FIG. 7). (See (G)). On the other hand, the development suggestion effect is configured, for example, as an effect display that shows that an ally character (a friend character) comes to help his character, then the character is standing up, and then chasing the escaped enemy character (see FIG. 13 (E) and (F)). Then, when this development suggestion effect is performed, it will develop into SPSP reach that represents a situation where the own character discovers the escaped enemy character and a battle between the own character and the enemy character is unfolded (FIG. 7 (I )reference).

  This SPSP reach is a reach production that has a higher hit reliability than normal reach and SP reach, and when the player wins a battle with an enemy character, the symbols are aligned and the jackpot is notified (see FIG. 7 (H)). When the player's character is defeated by the enemy character, the reach losing eye is pseudo-stopped, and then the main character is stopped to notify the losing (see FIG. 7G).

  As is clear from the above description, the take-off failure effect (see FIG. 7F-2) can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and when it is a loss. However, when the production progresses to the non-development suggestion production, the jackpot notification is not performed thereafter. On the other hand, when the production progresses from the take-off failure production to the development suggestion production, there are cases where the jackpot notification is performed and the loss notification is performed in the subsequent SPSP reach. In other words, when the production has progressed to a non-development suggestion, there is no possibility of a jackpot, whereas when the production has progressed to a development suggestion, the possibility of a jackpot remains. ing.

  Therefore, when the contention failure effect is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the development suggestion effect, not the non-development suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, the successful take-off effect (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is configured as, for example, an effect display indicating that the player character wins the enemy character and succeeds in taking the treasure chest (see FIG. 13A and FIG. 13). (See (H)). When this successful capture effect is performed, a doublet is formed immediately after the successful capture effect without any effect display indicating that the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is reduced. After the three decorative symbols to be simulated stop, the main stop is promptly stopped (see FIGS. 13H and 13).

  In this way, when a successful take effect is performed, a hit notification effect is provided for notifying that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed. For this reason, when it develops into a contention effect, a player can first enjoy the game while expecting that a successful capture effect will be performed instead of a capture failure effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called “next notice” may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7 (K)). This next notice is an effect suggesting that the SPSP reach will be developed later, and when the next notice is given, the normal reach is directly developed to the SPSP reach without going through the character SP reach (FIG. 7 ( E), (K), (I)).

  On the other hand, as a result of the first special symbol determination, a reach-less effect (see FIG. 7B) is performed in a part of the case where a winning jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6B) is won. After that, a hitting effect (see FIG. 7 (J)) is performed, and a jackpot notification (see FIG. 7 (H)) may be performed immediately after that. This hit effect is one of the notice effects for notifying that the jackpot game is executed before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. However, it is configured as an effect that suddenly the symbols (probability variation symbols in this embodiment) are aligned. The bumping effect is configured as an effect in which the three probable symbols that form the doublet are suddenly popping out, and as a suggestive effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in the probable gaming state after the jackpot game is over It has a function.

  In this way, by performing the bumping effect immediately after performing the reach-free production, it is possible to make the player who was not expecting a big hit based on the fact that the reach has not been realized to be surprised and surprised As a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation, the bumping effect can be executed, but when it is 6R normal, the bumping effect is not performed. Is adopted. In other words, the bumping effect can be executed when the odd symbol set is fully stopped along with the stop display of the first special symbol, while it is not executed when the even symbol set is fully stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player that the symbols are suddenly prepared, and after the jackpot game is finished, in a game state (probability change game state) more advantageous than 6R normal Since the game is controlled, the joy of the player with respect to the big hit can be effectively improved.

  On the other hand, in another embodiment, it may be possible to execute a bumping effect only when it is 16R probability variation, and a configuration that does not perform the bumping effect when it is 6R probability variation or 6R normal. In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a configuration capable of performing a hit effect may be employed. However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, when performing a bumping effect in which even symbols that normally function as symbols are suddenly arranged, it is possible to make the player who wants a promising big hit feel sufficient joy. As a result, there is a possibility that a high production effect cannot be obtained. For this reason, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which at least a hit effect can be executed when it is a probable big hit, while no hit effect is executed when it is a normal jackpot.

  For the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 7, the flow of effects from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 7A to the jackpot notification in FIG. 7H, and from the start of fluctuation in FIG. The flow of production until the loss notification of C) and (G) is based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game, the determination result of whether or not to perform the effect with reach, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Based on this, the sub CPU 131 sets it.

  Further, the specific effects described based on FIG. 7 are merely examples, and each effect may be another effect. For example, the contention effect may be an effect that displays an effect indicating that the player character is about to take back the mobile phone while the enemy character is likely to be taken away by the enemy character. In this case, an effect of performing an effect display indicating that the own character succeeds in regaining the mobile phone from the enemy character is executed as a successful take effect, and conversely, the own character is deprived of the mobile phone by the enemy character. It is conceivable to execute an effect for effect display as a capture failure effect. In addition, the character SP reach is not an effect that starts from a contention effect, but is simply an effect that displays an indication that the character is trying to destroy the middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol. For example, the effect may be that the symbols are aligned, and if the destruction fails, reach lose eyes are displayed.

  In another embodiment, an effect pattern that directly develops from character establishment to character SP reach or SPSP reach without going through normal reach may be prepared.

[Direction flow in probable gaming state]
Next, referring to FIG. 8, when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state, it is performed after the second special symbol variation display is started until the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. The flow of production will be described. Here, FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of effects in the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, when the game is controlled in the probability-changing game state, the player makes a right strike aiming at winning a game ball at the second starting port 12. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination when a game ball wins the second starting port 12. In the second special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in addition to the processing for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on FIG. 6 and the processing for determining the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. Processing is included, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives a change start command including information indicating the result of the second special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the panel lamp 25, A production pattern of production performed using various production means such as the frame lamp 37 and the production bonus 7 is set. Then, the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing an effect based on this setting.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the decorative symbol variation display is started with the start of the second special symbol variation display (see FIG. 8A). Here, when it is determined at the start of symbol variation that the non-reach effect is performed, for example, the non-reach effect is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol do not form a reach (see FIG. 8B). ). Since the reachless effect can be similar to the reachless effect described with reference to FIG. 7B, a detailed description thereof is omitted here. As described above, when a reach-less effect is performed in the probability variation gaming state, a loss notification effect is usually performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the break-off are pseudo-stopped and then stopped as they are (FIG. 8 (C )reference).

  On the other hand, when it is determined at the start of symbol variation that the effect with reach is performed, for example, the decorative symbol common to both the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped to reach the reach (see FIG. 8D). A battle reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as “battle reach”) is performed (see FIG. 8E). This battle reach is a reach production in which the player character and the enemy character battle, and when a victory suggestion effect (see FIG. 8 (F)) representing the victory of the player character against the enemy character is performed, the probable big hit Notification is made (see FIG. 8G). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, odd symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, 7 symbols, 9 symbols) function as probability variation symbols, and even symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols). , 8 symbols) function as normal symbols. For this reason, in the probability variation jackpot notification of FIG. 8 (G), an effect display is performed in which the actual stop is made after the three decorative symbols that are odd-numbered symbols are arranged in a pseudo manner.

  Note that the victory suggestion effect is performed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable jackpot, and when the win suggestion effect is performed and the probable jackpot is informed, the probable gaming state will continue. .

  On the other hand, following battle reach, a defeat suggestion effect (see FIG. 8 (H)) representing a situation where the player's character is defeated by an enemy character may be performed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, a normal hit notification is performed in which the three decorative symbols that are evenly arranged in the even symbol are pseudo-stopped and then stopped (FIG. 8). (See (I)). In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbol used for the normal jackpot notification is not limited to this. For example, any combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols used for the probability variation jackpot notification may be used. You may make it use.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable big hit, a revival effect (see FIG. 8J) may be performed following the defeat suggestion effect. This revival effect is configured as an effect that displays an effect indicating that the player character who has been defeated by an enemy character is revitalized by the appearance of an ally character and stands up. When this revival effect is performed, the above-described victory suggestion effect (see FIG. 8F) is performed, and a probable change jackpot notification (see FIG. 8G) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the revival effect is performed only when the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6 (C)) is a 16R probability variation that is to be stopped and displayed. At that time, the winning of 16R probability change will be rich. Therefore, the revival effect can be regarded as a notice effect for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed (hereinafter referred to as “hit notice”). The jackpot notice is an effect that can be executed when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “hit”, and is not executed when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”, the jackpot reliability is The production is 100%. In the present embodiment, many jackpot notices are prepared in addition to the revival effect, but in the present specification, these jackpot notices will be described as appropriate.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured as a game machine called a battle type, and is configured such that reach is not established unless a certain jackpot, such as a probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, is won in the probability variation gaming state. If your character wins the enemy character, the probable game state will continue, and if your character loses to the enemy character, the probable game state will end and fall into a short-time game state, making it easy to understand Yes.

  On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol determination, a reach-less effect (see FIG. 8B) is performed in a part of the case where the winning jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6C) is won. After that, there is a case where a promising big hit notification (see FIG. 8 (G)) is performed immediately after the bumping effect (see FIG. 8 (K)) is performed. In other words, the bumping effect can be executed when the 7 symbol set is fully stopped in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol, while it is not executed when other than the 7 symbol set is stopped. This hitting effect is one of the notice effects for notifying that the jackpot game is executed before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. However, it is configured as an effect that suddenly the symbols (probability variation symbols) are aligned.

  In this way, by performing the bumping effect immediately after performing the reach-free production, it is possible to make the player who was not expecting a big hit based on the fact that the reach has not been realized to be surprised and surprised As a result, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to execute the sudden effect when the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, 4R probability variation, and when it is 8R normal. A configuration that does not execute the hit effect is adopted. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to execute a hit effect only when there is a 16R probability change, and when other big hits such as 8R probability variation, 4R probability variation, and 8R normal are sudden hits. You may employ | adopt the structure which does not perform production. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a hit effect regardless of the kind of jackpot which concerns on a 2nd special symbol determination.

  In addition, regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 8, the flow of effects from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 8 (A) to the loss notification in FIG. 8 (C), from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 8 (A) to FIG. ) Is a flow of performance until the probability change notification, and the flow of performance from the start of fluctuation in FIG. 8A to the normal hit notification in FIG. 8I is a determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game. As a result, it is set by the sub CPU 131 based on the result of determining whether or not to perform the presence effect and the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

[Decoration of decorative designs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the decorativeness of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 9 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decorativeness of a decoration symbol.

(Decoration of decorative designs in normal gaming)
When the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the following decorative symbols are displayed in each effect section during the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, before reaching, which is an effect period from the start of decorative display of decorative symbols until reach is reached, a decorative symbol with a character added to a large number is displayed. This is the same during normal reach accompanying the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10D).

  On the other hand, in the character SP reach or SPSP reach accompanying the change display of the first special symbol, a decorative symbol composed of small numbers without characters is displayed. That is, in the case of developing from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, the character is removed from the decorative pattern consisting of a large number with the character attached, and the decorative pattern (number) is reduced from the center of the screen. It moves to the periphery (see, for example, FIGS. 10E to 10G). This character is a display (hereinafter referred to as “additional display”) superimposed on the back side of a number (in this embodiment, green or blue) constituting a decorative symbol. Different.

  In the following description, a decorative symbol made up of a large number with a character attached is referred to as a “first aspect decorative design”, and a decorative design made up of a small number without a character attached is referred to as a “second aspect decorative design”. Call.

  For example, when the decoration pattern of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped, and when the decoration pattern of the first aspect is changed to the decoration pattern of the second aspect (and vice versa), it is an additional display. The limbs of the character move and dress up to decide the pose. However, when scrolling, regardless of the speed, the limb of the character that is the additional display does not move and does not take a pose. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, and the additional display character does not move at all and becomes a still image. In another embodiment, while the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, while the additional display character may be dressed and determined.

  In addition, at the time of winning notification in which a decorative symbol in a mode for notifying a big hit or a loss is displayed with a stop display of the first special symbol, a decorative symbol in a display mode common to that before reaching is displayed (for example, FIG. 11E ), (H)). For this reason, when the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed following the character SP reach or SPSP reach, for example, the display mode of the decorative symbol is the reverse of that illustrated in FIG. Change occurs. In other words, the decoration pattern consisting of small numbers without characters (decoration pattern of the second aspect) moves from the periphery of the screen to the center of the screen while increasing, and accordingly, the characters are added to the decoration patterns (numbers). Is done. After the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect is expanded to the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect expanded three times, the decorative pattern becomes the state of the decorative pattern of the first aspect. Note that the decorative pattern of the second aspect enlarged three times and the decorative pattern of the first aspect may have substantially the same vertical and horizontal sizes.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the normal gaming state, before reaching the normal symbol where the decorative symbol having a large number and the character is attached (that is, the decorative symbol of the first mode) is displayed. It can be said that the decorativeness of the decorative pattern is high when the winner is notified. On the other hand, in character SP reach and SPSP reach, since the production using objects different from decorative designs such as characters and items is developed, small numbers without characters are attached so as not to interfere with this production. By displaying the decorative pattern made of (that is, the decorative pattern of the second aspect) on the periphery of the screen, the decorative pattern is prevented from lowering the visibility of the effect image used for the effect.

(Decoration of decorative designs in the probable gaming state)
When the game is controlled in the probable gaming state, for example, the decorative pattern of the second mode is variably displayed in synchronization with the variability display of the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the decorative pattern having the following display mode is displayed in each effect section during the variation display of the second special symbol. In other words, before reaching, which is the production period from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until reach is reached, a decorative symbol that is not shown in the figure but has no character attached to it (specifically, Is displayed (a decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect three times) (see, for example, FIG. 15C). The same applies to a winning notification in which the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped as the second special symbol is stopped. The “decorative pattern obtained by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect three times” may be displayed by enlarging the decorative pattern of the second aspect, or a state where the decorative pattern of the second aspect is magnified three times. This image data is prepared in advance in the control ROM 144 of the image sound control board 140 separately from the image data related to the decorative pattern of the second aspect, and may be displayed using this data.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the player is most interested in whether the reach is established with the probability variation symbol or the reach is established with the normal symbol. Also, the probability change game state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal game state (see FIG. 6A), and the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state is greater than the variation time of the first special symbol in the normal game state. However, in the relatively short game state, the performance is developed with a good tempo, and the winning is notified in a relatively short time after the big hit game is finished. For these reasons, in the probability variation gaming state, it is less necessary to increase the decorativeness of the decorative symbol than necessary, and in this embodiment, a configuration in which no character is added to the numbers constituting the decorative symbol is employed.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established and the battle is reached in the probability variation game state, the battle between the player character and the enemy character is developed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. For this reason, if a large number of decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the screen, even though no character is attached, a battle effect is hindered. For this reason, during the battle reach, the size and the display position of the decorative pattern change in order to display the decorative pattern of the second mode in the same way as during the character SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal gaming state. That is, the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect expanded three times is reduced to the same size as the decorative pattern of the second aspect in the character SP reach or the SPSP reach at the time of battle reach development, The decorative pattern of the second aspect that has not been enlarged is assumed to be displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 9, before reaching in the probability-changing gaming state or at the time of winning notification, the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are displayed in large numbers, but in common with the state before reaching or at the time of winning notification in the normal gaming state. The difference is that no character is attached. Also, compared with character SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal gaming state, it is common in that no character is attached, but is different in that the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are large. From these things, it can be said that the decorative design displayed in the probability variation gaming state before reaching or at the time of winning notification has a medium decorative property. On the other hand, during the battle reach, the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are small and the same as the character SP reach or the SPSP reach in that no character is given, so the decoration of the decorative symbols displayed during the battle reach It can be said that the nature is low.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, control for changing the display mode of the decorative symbol is performed in order to change the decorative property of the decorative symbol in accordance with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Specifically, the state of the decorative pattern of the first aspect becomes the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect, or the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect becomes the state of the decorative pattern of the first aspect. To do. Note that both the decorative pattern of the first aspect and the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed simultaneously. For example, in normal reach, the left and right symbols that have been pseudo-stopped are in the state of the first design, and the middle design that scrolls slowly downward is expanded with the second design (for example, with scrolling). Or may be reduced).

[Specific example: Pattern that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach]
10 and 11 are screen views showing specific examples of effects that develop into SPSP reach via normal reach. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing a specific example of the decorative symbol display mode when the promotion effect is executed.

  In FIG. 10A, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. A state in which a loss notification effect in which a decorative symbol of a mode indicating that it is present is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as green hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is displayed. Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second hold icon is shifted to the position where the earliest hold icon was displayed. The shift process is performed, and accordingly, the decorative symbol variation display is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B).

  Here, when the variation display pattern that develops to SPSP reach via the normal reach when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the following effects are performed, for example.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the decorative symbol change display, first, three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, and then the same three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and reach is established (FIG. 10C). reference). When the reach is established in this way, the above-described normal reach is performed (see FIG. 10D).

  During this normal reach, if the same middle symbol (here, three symbols) as the reach symbol passes through the effective line as a result of the scroll display of the middle symbol row, then the scroll speed of the middle symbol row increases. Thus, the SPSP reach may be developed (see FIGS. 10E to 10G). At that time, the three symbol rows displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced while maintaining the reach state and moved to the upper left region of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 10F). The decorative pattern is a decorative pattern of the second aspect that is reduced after the state of the decorative pattern of the first aspect is changed to the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect that is first enlarged three times. It becomes a certain state. When the size and display area of the three symbol rows are changed in this way (that is, when the state of the decorative pattern of the first aspect is changed to the state of the decorative pattern of the second aspect), the liquid crystal screen SPSP reach is executed using the area in the center of the screen (see FIG. 10G).

  In the present embodiment, the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is pseudo-stopped in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5, while the middle symbol continues to be scrolled at high speed. When the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed, the scroll speed is slowed down or increased to focus on the trend of the middle pattern, whereas the decorative pattern of the second mode is small. Even if the scroll speed is changed, it is difficult to understand, and there is a possibility that the production effect cannot be improved effectively. For this reason, when the decoration pattern of a 2nd aspect is displayed, the structure which makes the display aspect of a middle pattern different from when the decoration pattern of a 1st aspect is displayed is employ | adopted. Specifically, when the decorative symbol of the second mode is displayed, the scroll speed of the middle symbol is constant (high-speed fluctuation). In other embodiments, when the decorative symbol of the second mode is displayed, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol may be slow (or fast), or the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation is hidden. Also good. The speed at which the decorative pattern of the second aspect scrolls at high speed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative pattern of the first aspect scrolls at high speed, or both may be the same speed.

  Further, the reach symbol (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) displayed in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed on the near side of the other effect image. For this reason, for example, when another effect image is displayed on the entire screen, the reach design is superimposed on the front side. Note that only the reach symbol is displayed in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen 5 so that the reach symbol can be visually recognized even when other effect images are displayed.

  FIG. 10 (G) shows a situation where two own characters and enemy characters are confronting each other. However, when SPSP reach is developed, first, SPSP such as “Decisive Battle OOVS XXX” is shown. Title display for displaying the reach title related to the reach production is performed. And the battle production which shows a mode that an own character and an enemy character battle is started.

  When the SPSP reach is performed in this way, an operation promotion effect is performed when the SPSP reach ends (see FIG. 10H). This operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26. Specifically, for example, a button image imitating the effect button 26, a message such as “Press!” It is configured as an effect to display a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the button operation is effective.

  Here, when the player performs an operation within the effective period, an effect called cut-in is performed as an operation-compatible effect that is an effect corresponding to the operation (see FIG. 10I). Here, the cut-in is configured as an effect in which a specific effect image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image related to SPSP reach, and the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display mode of the specific effect image. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the blue cut-in suggesting that the jackpot reliability is about 10%, the red cut-in having a jackpot reliability of about 60%, and the jackpot reliability being 100%. Is prepared, and one of these three cut-ins is executed according to the operation based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

  In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which cut-in does not occur unless the player performs an operation. However, in other embodiments, when the operation is not performed, the valid period ends. A configuration that automatically generates cut-in may be employed. In the present embodiment, the operation promotion effect and the cut-in corresponding to the operation are generated during the SPSP reach but not during the character SP reach. In other embodiments, the SPSP is used. You may employ | adopt the structure which can generate cut-in also in reach productions other than reach (for example, during character SP reach).

  When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, at the end of the first special symbol's change display, that is, at the end of the SPSP reach, a victory notification effect that notifies the player that the enemy character defeated the enemy character and won the battle. (See FIG. 11A). In this victory notification effect, for example, the characters “Victory!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the sound “Victory!” Is output from the speaker 24, and the director 7 is rotated while emitting the rainbow color. An example of such an effect is as follows. When this victory notification effect is performed, the same decorative design as the reach design (decorative design of the second mode) is pseudo-stopped as the middle design during the reach design (decorative design of the second mode) (FIG. 11). (See (A) and timing T1 in FIG. 12 (A)). Accordingly, although not shown in the figure, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit rainbow colors.

  Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol comes to an end, the three decorative symbols (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) in which characters are added to large numbers are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 11). (See (B) and timing T2 in FIG. 12A). In FIG. 11B, for convenience of explanation, the notation of characters attached to the numbers constituting the decorative design is omitted.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbols of the three first forms forming the double-eyed pattern are pseudo-stopped, the “first reflection effect” is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (See FIG. 12A). The “first reflection effect” is an effect in which highlight light such as metallic luster is added to each decorative design, and an effect sound such as “Pichan!” Is output from the speaker 24. In the first reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added to the middle symbol and the right symbol at the same time as highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left symbol. As a result, the light radiated to the decorative design can appear to be mirror-reflected on the front of the decorative design, and three identical decorative designs can be emphasized as if they had a metallic luster. I can emphasize more.

  In the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative pattern of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative pattern of the second aspect.

  In addition, while three decorative symbols ("333" in the example shown in FIG. 11B) may be stopped as they are, a notification effect may be performed, while three decorative symbols forming a doublet are falsely stopped. After that, a promotion effect (see FIG. 11C) may be performed (timing T3 in FIG. 12A). This promotion effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is promoted to 16R probability change depending on whether or not the three decorative symbols forming the doublet are changed to three decorative symbols forming the “777” doublet. . This promotion effect is composed of the first half and the second half, and the first half effect is common in both the case where the promotion failure effect is performed and the case where the promotion success effect is performed in the second half. Specifically, in the first half of this promotion effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 11C, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) fade out toward the back of the liquid crystal screen 5. The state in which the three decorative symbols become smaller is maintained for about several seconds (for example, 3 seconds).

  In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the three decorative symbols indicating the “333” double-eyed pattern are pseudo-stopped. For this reason, when the jackpot symbol X2 is stopped as the first special symbol, these decorative symbols are stopped as they are, thereby informing that the 6R probability change has been won.

  Here, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 6R probability variation, the promotion failure effect as the latter half of the promotion effect is performed following the first half of the promotion effect (FIGS. 11C and 11D). 12 (A) timing T4). This promotion failure effect is an effect in which the three decorative symbols that have become smaller in the first half of the promotion effect come back as they are, without changing to other decorative symbols, and stop falsely, and notify the promotion failure Accompanied by production sound output. In the example shown in FIG. 11, following the promotion failure effect, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the “333” doublet stop as they are (FIGS. 11E and 12A). ) (See timing T5). Then, when the hit notification effect is performed for a predetermined time, the opening period of the jackpot game is started, and in the opening period, the effect of notifying the type of the jackpot and the right-handed suggestion that prompts the player to make a right-hand hit are performed (FIG. 11 (F)). Specifically, the characters “BIG BONUS” are displayed and the sound is output to notify that the type of jackpot is 6R probability change, and the sound “Please turn right” is output and “Right The effect of displaying the word “hit” and a right-pointing arrow on the upper right end of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed. During the subsequent round game, one decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the second mode) showing the same number as the stopped decorative symbol is displayed, and this decorative symbol is erased when the ending is started. .

  On the other hand, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the promotion success effect as the latter half of the promotion effect is performed following the first half of the promotion effect (FIGS. 11C and 11G, FIG. 12). (See timing T4 in (A)). This promotion success effect changes the three decorative symbols (here, “333”) that faded out to the back of the LCD screen 5 and changed to three decorative symbols “777” indicating 16R probability variation. This is an effect that makes a large pseudo stop at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and is accompanied by an output of an effect sound informing the promotion success. When this promotion success effect is performed, the notification effect is performed when the three decorative symbols indicating “777” double-stopped are stopped as they are (see timing T5 in FIGS. 11H and 12A). Then, in the opening period of the jackpot game, an effect for notifying the type of jackpot or a right-handed suggestion for urging the player to right-hand is performed (see FIG. 11 (I)). The effect during the opening period is the same as the effect described above with reference to FIG. 11 (F), except that the characters “HYPER BONUS” are displayed instead of “BIG BONUS” and audio is output. To do. During the round game, one 7 symbols (decorative symbols of the second mode) are displayed, and these 7 symbols are deleted when the ending is started.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure effect or the promotion success effect is started, the “second reflection effect” is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) (FIG. 12A). )reference). The “second reflection effect” is, for example, adding highlight light to each decorative pattern in the same way as the first reflection effect, and character lines (for example, “the time is full”) attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. ”Is output from the speaker 24. In the second reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers constituting the left symbol, and at the same time, the numbers constituting the middle symbol and the right symbol are similarly highlighted. Add light. In this way, the second reflection effect is the first in which highlight light is attached to the entire decorative design in that highlight light is attached to the numbers but no highlight light is attached to the character. It is different from reflection production. This makes it possible to emphasize the decorative pattern of the pattern-aligned form to be stopped from now on without reducing the visibility of the character that emits the above-mentioned lines.

  In the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative pattern of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative pattern of the second aspect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 12A, the present embodiment is configured such that the stop display timing of the first special symbol comes when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the end of the second reflection effect. ing. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative symbol starts the actual stop when a predetermined time (4 seconds in the example of FIG. 12A) has elapsed since the end of the second reflection effect. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflection effect and the main stop, for example, even if a frame drop due to double buffering occurs in the second reflection effect, it is possible to prevent the main stop from being affected.

  Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when executing the image data drawing process, the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 provides two development areas for image data and alternately develops image data in each development area. Do double buffering. For example, when the amount of image data at the time of executing the second reflection effect is large, it may take time to generate an image, and the previously displayed screen may be redisplayed, which may cause frame dropping. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the image sound control board 140 is an image (determined by the presentation control board 130) that is determined at the start of the variable presentation when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147 (not shown). Is generated and output. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control board 140 does not generate the image determined at the start of the changing effect (determined by the effect control board 130). For example, the signal output unit 147 does not output a predetermined signal when the previously displayed screen is displayed again (when a frame drop occurs). In this case, the image sound control board 140 may generate and output another image different from the image determined at the start of the change effect (determined by the effect control board 130).

  For example, when the variation pattern D or I is selected, it is decided that the big-decoration decoration pattern (decoration pattern of the first aspect) will be stopped at the timing when 70 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation of the first special symbol. In this case, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control board 140 can stop the decorative design at the above timing. On the other hand, even when it is determined to output an image in which the decorative symbol is actually stopped at the above timing, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image acoustic control board 140 The decorative symbols are not fully stopped at the above timing. In this case, the image sound control board 140 may output an image other than the stopped decorative pattern. For this reason, in this embodiment, a decorative design may not be displayed in a situation where a frame drop occurs.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which a predetermined time is provided between the second reflection effect and the main stop, a period (the predetermined time) in which the data amount of the image data is small after the second reflection effect ends. It is possible to stop the decorative design through As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the decorative design without being affected by dropped frames.

  As illustrated in FIG. 12B, in the present embodiment, even in the normal game state (that is, the first special symbol) even in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state (that is, during the variation display of the second special symbol). In some cases, a promotion effect similar to that during the change display) is executed. Specifically, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is approaching the end, three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See, for example, timing T6 in FIGS. 28H and 12B). When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the pseudo stop, an effect similar to the first half of the promotion effect in the normal gaming state is performed in a shorter execution time (for example, 2 seconds) than in the normal gaming state ( Timing T7 in FIG.

  If a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure effect or the promotion success effect is started following the first half of the promotion effect, the “third reflection effect” is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (Timing T8 in FIG. 12B). The “third reflection effect” is the same effect as the first reflection effect, but the highlight light is attached to the decoration pattern that is three times larger than the decoration pattern of the second aspect. It is different from the first reflection effect in that it is not a decorative design. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the end of the third reflection effect, the stop display timing of the second special symbol arrives, and the decorative symbol is finally stopped along with this (T9 in FIG. 12B). ). The predetermined time between the third reflection effect and the main stop is a period for preventing the frame from being affected even if a frame drop occurs in the third reflection effect. By limiting this period to the minimum time that can prevent the effects of dropped frames, it can be configured to be shorter than the period between the reflection effect and the regular stop in the normal gaming state, and the progress of the game in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state Can be speeded up.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 11, a case has been described in which an odd effect other than 7 symbols (probability variation symbol) is changed to 7 symbols and a promotion effect that makes it appear that 6R probability variation is promoted to 16R probability variation is performed. By changing the even-numbered symbol of the zebra eye to the odd-numbered symbol of the zebra eye, a promotion effect that makes it appear that the normal jackpot is promoted to a probable jackpot may be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, these promotion effects are performed shortly before the first special symbol is stopped, but in other embodiments, these promotion effects may be performed during the jackpot game.

  As a promotion effect that makes it appear that a normal jackpot has been promoted to a promising jackpot during a jackpot game, for example, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the button 26 during a round game of a predetermined round is performed. For example, an effect of displaying a character such as “get certain change!” Or outputting a predetermined notification sound in response to the button operation by means of.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, as a promotion effect that makes it appear that the 6R probability change or 6R normal has been promoted to a round of 16R probability, for example, in the sixth long open round game, a character such as “EXTRA ROUND GET!” Is displayed. In addition, an effect of operating the effect actor 7 while outputting the sound is given as an example. Such a round promotion effect may be performed when the long open round game of the seventh round is started, not during the long open round game of the sixth round.

  Note that a configuration in which the jackpot notice is easier to execute (may be always executed) when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probable jackpot than the normal jackpot is adopted. It is possible. By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot notice effect is executed, the promotion success effect is easier to be executed than when the jackpot notice effect is not executed, and the player's response to the jackpot notice being executed Expectation can be enhanced effectively. When a jackpot notice is executed, the promotion success effect may be executed without fail.

  In addition, when the variation pattern A is selected, since a sudden effect is performed in which the symbols are suddenly aligned and the actual stop is performed as it is, a promotion effect is produced when the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A. Is never done.

  In other embodiments, the first reflection effect may be executed using the second decorative design. For example, immediately after the end of the victory notification effect (timing T <b> 2 in FIG. 12A), the decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times is stopped in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. By executing the first reflection effect using such a decorative design, it is possible to improve the continuity with the victory notification effect and improve the sense of unity. After the first reflection effect, the second reflection effect may be executed using the decorative design. In this case, since the character is not attached to the decorative symbol, the entire decorative symbol is highlighted in the second reflection effect as in the first reflection effect. Alternatively, after the first reflection effect, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first half of the promotion effect has ended, the decoration pattern of the first mode is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 instead of the decoration pattern. The second reflection effect may be executed using the decorative design by making a pseudo stop.

  In another embodiment, for example, the second reflection effect is an effect in which highlight light is not applied to the numbers constituting the decorative design while highlight light is applied to the characters forming the decorative design. It is good. As a result, it is possible to emphasize a decorative pattern in a pattern-aligned form without reducing the visibility of numbers.

  In other embodiments, for example, an effect of highlighting the entire decorative design (specifically, the numbers and characters that make up the decorative design), or an effect of highlighting the entire screen centering on the decorative design, It is good also as a 2nd reflection effect. Thereby, for example, a dynamic effect can be realized as compared with highlighting only numbers, and a decorative pattern in a pattern-matching mode can be more emphasized.

  In another embodiment, only the second reflection effect may be executed without executing the first reflection effect. In addition, a period from the end of the second reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (normal game state) and a period from the end of the third reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (probability game state or short-time game state). The same time (for example, 4 seconds) may be used.

  Also, the period from the end of the second reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (normal game state), the period from the end of the third reflection effect in the probability variation game state to the main stop of the decorative symbol, and the first in the short-time game state The period from the end of the 3 reflection effect to the actual stop of the decorative symbol may be different or the same.

  Each effect that is executed until the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbols are in the same pattern and is finally stopped can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitely predicts that the jackpot game will be executed. Furthermore, each production from the start of the promotion failure production or the promotion success production until the decoration symbol is fully stopped has a function of notifying which type of jackpot game will be executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends Can be regarded as a jackpot notice with a function to notify.

  It should be noted that not only the case where the jackpot is notified by SPSP reach but also the case where the jackpot is notified by normal reach or character SP reach has been described with reference to FIG. 11 (B) and thereafter and FIG. 12 (A). A similar effect is executed.

  Further, the effects described with reference to FIG. 11B and after and with reference to FIG. 12 may be executed when the reach symbol is 7 symbols (that is, when the probability is 16R), or may not be executed. . In the former case, there is no need to change the scale of the production after the pattern match according to the type of reach design, and in the latter case, it is possible to suppress the execution of the promotion effect that has no possibility of changing the pattern match mode. it can.

  Further, depending on the type of jackpot, the period from the end of the second reflection effect (or the third reflection effect) to the final stop of the decorative symbol may be different or the same. For example, the period from the end of the second reflection effect (or the third reflection effect) to the final stop of the decorative symbol may be longer or shorter in the case of 16R probability variation than in the case of other big hits. May be.

[Specific examples of character SP reach]
Next, a specific example of the character SP reach in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the character SP reach.

  When the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, when the normal reach (see FIG. 7 (E)) is developed to the competition for character SP reach (see FIG. 7 (F-1)), the three symbols forming the reach are displayed. In a state where the columns are displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5, a contention effect is shown that shows that the player character and the enemy character are competing for a treasure box (an example of an item) (see FIG. 13A). Although not shown in FIG. 13 (A), when the contention effect is started, a character such as “Take back the treasure chest from the enemy!” Is displayed and the sound is output. Title display for displaying the reach title is performed.

  Subsequent to the contention effect, there may be a capture failure effect that represents the player's own character being stolen by the enemy character and falling down (see FIG. 13B). Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation is a loss, the enemy character who took the treasure box will leave and display a character such as “escape ...” (See FIG. 13C). This non-development suggesting effect is an effect that suggests that the character SP reach will not develop to the SPSP reach, and when the non-development suggesting effect is performed, the reach stop eye (for example, “343”) is pseudo-stopped and then this stop A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 13D).

  On the other hand, following the contention production, the player's own character who has fallen with the help of his friends stands up, and a development suggestion production in which characters such as “I will follow the enemy!” Are displayed (FIG. 13 (E) and (See (F)). This development suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the character SP reach will develop into the SPSP reach. When the development suggestion effect is performed, a title display that displays the reach title related to SPSP reach such as “Decisive Battle VS VS XXX” is performed, and the battle effect in which the own character and the enemy character battle is started. (See FIG. 13G).

  When the SPSP reach is developed in this way, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, a hit notification effect is executed following the SPSP reach, and if it is a loss, the SPSP reach is reached. Subsequently, the loss notification effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a successful capture effect may be performed following the contention effect, indicating that the player's character has successfully captured the treasure chest from the enemy character (see FIG. 13 (H)). In this successful take-off production, three decorative symbols (probability variation or normal symbol) that form a doublet are popped out from the treasure chest that has been recaptured, and a big hit is made by stopping these three decorative symbols. Notification is made (see FIG. 13I).

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the result effect of the contention effect (see FIG. 13A), the successful capture effect (see FIG. 13H) or the capture failure effect (see FIG. 13B). ) Can be executed, and the capture success effect is executed when the change pattern C is selected as the change pattern of the first special symbol, and thereafter the winning notification effect is always executed (for example, FIG. 17A). And (B)).

  On the other hand, when the capture failure effect (see FIG. 13B) is executed, the development suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13)) suggesting that the effect develops from the character SP reach (previous stage effect) to the SPSP reach (post stage effect). E) and (F)) are performed, and there is a non-development suggesting effect (see FIG. 13C) that suggests that the character SP reach does not evolve into the SPSP reach.

  If this non-development suggestion effect is performed, there is no possibility that a hit notification effect will be performed after that. However, if the development suggestion effect is performed, the hit notification effect is performed at the later SPSP reach. (Refer to the flow of (F-4), (I), (H) in FIG. 7, the column of the fluctuation pattern E in FIG. 17). In this way, even if a take-off failure effect is performed following the contention effect, there is still a possibility that a hit notification effect will be performed, so even if a take-off failure effect is performed, the player The game can be enjoyed while expecting a development suggestion effect without losing the jackpot.

[Specific examples of bumping effects in the normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a specific example of the bumping effect in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the bumping effect in the normal gaming state.

  In FIG. 14A, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. A state in which a loss notification effect in which a decorative symbol of a mode indicating that it is present is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is displayed. Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second hold icon is shifted to the position where the earliest hold icon was displayed. In accordance with this, high-speed scrolling display of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 14A and 14B).

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probable big hit, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a sudden effect is executed.

  Specifically, for example, immediately after the start of the high-speed scrolling display of the decorative symbols, a darkening effect is performed in which a black effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 14C). In the present embodiment, this darkening effect is performed during the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbol until 2 seconds elapses. By this darkening effect, the screen becomes dark and the gaming machine It is possible to make the player feel that 1 is out of order.

  The darkening effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a black effect image in full screen on the front side of the decorative design. For this reason, during the darkening effect, the decorative pattern of the first aspect continues to be variably displayed, but the decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized (the decorative pattern of the first aspect is not displayed). In addition, with the start of the darkening effect, a small decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of the second aspect) is changed from the state of variably displaying the decorative pattern of the first aspect to the second aspect during the character SP reach and the SPSP reach. The display may be variably displayed at a position (for example, the lower left corner of the performance liquid crystal screen 5) different from the position where the decorative pattern is displayed.

  This darkening effect may be accompanied by turning off the light-emitting elements incorporated in the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effector 7. Further, as in the present embodiment, when a darkening effect is performed to hide the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal screen 5, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the first special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. is there. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a symbol called the 4th symbol, which is different from the decorative symbol, is displayed on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5 to notify that the special symbol is being variably displayed. A configuration is adopted in which the symbol is continuously displayed at a constant speed while the special symbol is being displayed, and is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the winning symbol is displayed as the special symbol is stopped. In the fourth symbol, two corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol are prepared separately. The 4th pattern is a small image of the same shape of red, yellow, green, and blue (for example, a square with a side of 5 mm), and these are the same position in the order of red → yellow → green → blue → red →. The display is changed to display the change. For example, when the red 4th symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol, the 16R probability change is performed. When the yellow 4th symbol is stopped and displayed, the 6R probability change is performed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, 6R is normal, and when the blue fourth symbol is stopped and displayed, it is lost. The fourth symbol is an image that is displayed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol being executed. In addition, since the 4th symbol is displayed on the near side of the other effect image and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even if the effect actor 7 is operated, a part or all of the 4 symbols can not be visually recognized. However, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility of reducing the interest of the darkening effect. For this reason, in another embodiment, instead of displaying the 4th symbol on the liquid crystal screen 5, a 4th symbol lamp (for example, LED) for displaying the 4th symbol is provided separately, and the black color is displayed during the darkening effect. A configuration in which no effect image other than the effect image is displayed may be employed.

  The 4th symbol and the decorative symbol start to be changed in accordance with the change display of the special symbol, and are stopped to be displayed in response to the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the stop-displayed 4th symbol is the same as the decorative symbol in this respect, in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed to notify the player of the same content (big hit or miss). . However, since the 4th symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed in an inconspicuous position and manner, it is difficult for the player to be aware of it. In addition, the number of symbols that are variably displayed in the 4th symbol is smaller than that in the decorative symbol, and the 4th symbol is variably displayed at a constant speed regardless of the type of effect being performed, whereas the decorative symbol is scrolled at a scroll speed. Can be said to be different in display mode. It should be noted that the speed at which the 4th symbol is variably displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols of the first aspect and the second aspect scroll at high speed.

  Next, following the darkening effect, an effect display in which the three decorative symbols composing the “777” double eyes suddenly pop out and stop in the middle of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed over, for example, about 3 seconds (see FIG. 14 (D)). Then, the three decorative symbols “777” are stopped as they are and a hit notification effect is provided to notify the 16R probability change (see FIG. 14E).

  Such a bumping effect can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probable big hit, but is not executed when the determination result is lost. For this reason, the hit effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed.

  The hit effect is an effect of notifying the jackpot without going through reach establishment. For this reason, when the impact effect is performed, the decorative symbol is not displayed small. This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the player has suddenly hit the game without being developed into a character SP reach or SPSP reach that can be expected to be a big hit, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

  The bumping effect is an effect that makes the player feel that the jackpot has been suddenly notified immediately after the decorative symbol variation display is started, so the bumping effect is started after the decorative symbol variation display is started. It is preferable that the time required for the display and the time required for the bumping effect be short, but as long as these conditions are not significantly deviated, the bumping effect will be displayed after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started. The time until the start and the time until the hit notification effect is performed after the hit effect is started may be different from the time exemplified in the present embodiment.

  In addition, here, the case where the bumping effect is composed of a darkening effect (see FIG. 14C) and an effect that suddenly appears as a doublet (see FIG. 14D) has been described as an example. In another embodiment, a bumping effect that does not include a darkening effect may be performed. In other words, as long as it is possible to make the player feel that the game has suddenly become a big hit, the effect display related to the bumping effect may be any effect display.

[Specific examples of battle reach in probabilistic gaming state]
Next, a specific example of battle reach in the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of battle reach in the probability variation gaming state.

  In FIG. 15A, the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost in a state where three hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. A state in which a loss notification effect in which a decorative symbol of a mode indicating that it is present is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as green hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the second corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the first hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is shifted to the area 53, and the remaining hold icons are shifted to the area 53 side in the second hold icon display area 52. In accordance with this, high-speed scrolling display of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 15A and 15B).

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the region 53 is 16R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed. If this happens, the following effects may be performed.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the second special symbol variation display is started, 7 symbols (decoration symbol of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped in the left column, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. Reach establishment reverberation effect is performed to raise the player's expectation (see FIG. 15C). This reach establishment effect is an effect of slowly moving a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating a number in common with the left symbol (here, seven symbols) from top to bottom in the right column. Reaching is established when the decorative symbols indicating the numbers in common are stopped in the right column (see FIG. 15D). On the other hand, when a decorative design showing a number different from the left design is falsely stopped in the right column, reach is usually not established and a loss is reported.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment employs a configuration capable of achieving reach with 7 symbols only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which, if a reach is established with 7 symbols in the probability-changing gaming state, a hit notification effect is always performed for 7 symbols. For this reason, the establishment of reach in the 7 symbols can be regarded as one of the jackpot notices.

  In addition, here, the case where the reach establishment effect that dictates the establishment of the 7 symbol reach has been described as an example, but the same effect is also performed when the reach establishment with other decorative symbols is dictated.

  When the reach is established as described above, although not shown in FIG. 15, the title display for displaying the reach title related to the battle reach such as “Decisive Battle OOVS XXX” is performed. During the reach title display, the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed. And the battle production which shows a mode that a self-character and an enemy character battle with the decoration pattern of a 2nd aspect displayed is started (refer FIG.15 (E)). At that time, the three symbol rows forming the reach move to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 while being reduced.

  Then, at the final stage of the battle reach, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 is performed (see FIG. 15F). Since this operation promotion effect is the same as the operation promotion effect performed during the SPSP reach described above with reference to FIG. 10 (H), detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Here, when the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, a victory suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the player character has won by defeating the enemy character (see FIG. 15G). . In this victory suggestion effect, the character “Destroy!” Indicating that the player character has defeated the enemy character is displayed and the sound is output, and the director 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three symbol rows displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner that shows a double eye (see FIG. 15G).

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable big hit, it is preferable to perform a victory suggesting effect regardless of whether or not the player has operated the effect button 26 during the effective period. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player does not perform a button operation during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect during the battle reach, the victory suggesting effect is performed at the timing when the effective period ends. Configuration is adopted.

  In this way, when the victory suggestion effect is performed, the three decorative symbols that have been pseudo-stopped at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed in a large size in the state of being pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 15H). ) With the stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols are stopped (see FIG. 15I).

  In addition, although the case where the reach was established with 7 symbols and the operation promotion effect was performed during the battle reach was described here as an example, the same effect is also performed when the reach is established with other decorative symbols. However, if the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is a probable jackpot, a victory suggestion effect is performed, but if the jackpot is a normal jackpot, a defeat suggestion effect indicating how the player's character is defeated by an enemy character is performed. Is called. That is, even if the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, the victory suggestion effect is not performed, and the defeat suggestion effect is performed instead. When this defeat suggestion effect is performed, three decorative symbols (for example, even-numbered doublet) showing a normal jackpot (8R normal corresponding to the jackpot symbol Y4 in this embodiment) are greatly simulated in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Stop and then stop. In this case, the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the jackpot game in which the eight long open round games are completed. That is, the player falls from the probable gaming state.

[Specific example of bumping effect in probabilistic gaming state]
Next, a specific example of the bumping effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the bumping effect in the probability variation gaming state.

  In FIG. 16A, the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost when three hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. A state in which a losing notification effect in which a decorative symbol of an aspect (here "246") indicating that it is present is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as red hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 51. Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, a shift process is performed for each hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 51, and the decorative symbol variation display (high-speed scroll display) is started (FIGS. 16A and 16B). )reference).

  Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable big hit, and a variation pattern having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a sudden effect is executed.

  This bumping effect is partly in common with the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state, so the description of the common points will be omitted, but immediately after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol The darkening effect is performed (see FIG. 16C), and the effect object 7 operates almost simultaneously with the three decorative symbols indicating “777” in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 being suddenly displayed. (See FIG. 16D). Then, a hit notification effect is performed when the three decorative symbols that have been pseudo-stopped are stopped as they are (see FIG. 16E).

  Note that this bumping effect is a dedicated effect in the case of winning a promising big hit like the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state. For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot or a loss, the bumping effect is not performed. As is clear from this, the bumping effect in the probability-changing gaming state can be regarded as one of the jackpot notices for definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed.

  In this embodiment, three types of probability variation jackpots, 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 4R probability variation, are prepared as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. A configuration capable of performing a hit effect is adopted. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a winning effect can be executed when winning 16 odd variations, while a sudden effect is not executed when winning 8R or 4R odd variations. It may be adopted. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a hit effect regardless of the kind of jackpot which concerns on a 2nd special symbol determination.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the variation | change time of the 1st special symbol and the variation | change_time of a 2nd special symbol at the time of performing a struck effect are the same, even if these variation times differ from each other Good. The effect mode of the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state and the bumping effect effect mode performed in the probability-changing gaming state may be the same or different from each other. .

  It should be noted that the effect mode of the bumping effect is not limited to the one described above, and any effect mode may be used as long as the player can feel that it has suddenly been a big hit. For example, in the case where the 16R probability variation is won as a result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), even if a rush effect is executed immediately after the reach is established or during the reach effect Good.

  For example, the impact production immediately after the reach is established, immediately after the reach is established (for example, 0.5 seconds later), a middle symbol showing the same number as the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped appears on the active line suddenly. It stops, and all the decoration symbols may stop this immediately after that (all are the decoration symbols of a 1st aspect). In such a case, it can be said that the hit effect is an effect that is a big hit without the reach effect being executed even after the reach establishment. The hit effect may be executed almost simultaneously with the reach establishment. In this case, for example, when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol showing the same number as the left symbol is suddenly valid almost simultaneously with the right design showing the same number as the left symbol on the active line. It may appear on the line and stop in a pseudo manner, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be fully stopped (both are decorative symbols in the first mode).

  For example, the bumping effect during normal reach may be executed when the scroll speed of the medium symbol that has been scroll-displayed at high speed gradually decreases. For example, if a bumping effect is executed during normal reach, the middle symbol showing the same number as the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped suddenly appears on the active line at the timing when the middle symbol slowly begins to scroll downward. The pseudo stop may be performed, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be stopped (all are the decorative symbols of the first aspect). In such a case, it can be said that the hit effect is an effect that suddenly becomes a big hit with normal reach without developing into character SP reach or SPSP reach.

  In addition, for example, the hit effect during the character SP reach is that the own character and the enemy character are competing for the treasure box in a state where the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. It may be executed during the contention production showing. For example, when the bumping effect is executed during the contention effect, the middle symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect enlarged three times) indicating the same number as the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It suddenly stops in the center and stops. Then, the reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by expanding the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, immediately after that. All the decorative symbols may be stopped. In such a case, the bumping effect is an effect that is suddenly a big hit with the character SP reach without the effect executed at the end of the character SP reach being performed and without developing into the SPSP reach.

  Further, for example, the hit effect during battle reach shows a state in which the player character and the enemy character battle in a state where the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. You may perform during a battle production. For example, when the impact effect is executed in the middle of the battle effect, the middle symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect enlarged three times) showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Suddenly appearing in the center of, stop false. Then, the reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by expanding the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, immediately after that. All the decorative symbols may be stopped. In such a case, it can be said that the hit effect is an effect that is suddenly a big hit in battle reach without the effect executed at the end of the battle reach being executed.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal gaming state]
FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used for processing for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the normal gaming state.

  The main ROM 102 includes a probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17A) and a normal jackpot variation as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the normal gaming state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B) and a reach / losing variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17C) are stored. Here, the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probability variation jackpot” in the normal gaming state. The The normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “normal jackpot” in the normal gaming state. . The reach-losing variation pattern selection table selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss and it is determined that a reachable effect is to be performed in the normal gaming state. Used for processing.

  In the explanatory diagrams related to the various tables shown in FIG. 17 and subsequent figures, the range that each random number can take is set to a range that is smaller than the actual range for easy explanation.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 17A, in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the variation pattern random number. In FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the first special symbol, the type of variation effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation effect pattern Specific production contents, a range that the variation pattern random number can take, and a ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the possible range of the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set to “0” to “99”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the normal gaming state and selects 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation as the type of jackpot, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or symbol random number is “0” to If any one of “9”, the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern A from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “10” to “11”, the variation pattern B is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern B from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “12” to “19”, the variation pattern C is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern C from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “20” to “49”, the variation pattern D is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern D from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “50” to “99”, the variation pattern E is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern E from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select.

  In the probability variation big hit variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17A), ten random values of “0” to “9” are assigned to the variation pattern A. For this reason, the ratio at which the variation pattern A is selected when the probability variation is a big hit is 10% (= 10/100). In addition, since two random numbers “10” to “11” are assigned to the variation pattern B, the proportion of the variation pattern B selected when the probability variation is a big hit is 2% (= 2) / 100). Further, since eight random numbers “12” to “19” are assigned to the variation pattern C, the proportion of the variation pattern C selected when it is a probable big hit is 8% (= 8 / 100). Further, since 30 random numbers “20” to “49” are assigned to the variation pattern D, the proportion of the variation pattern D selected when it is a probable large hit is 30% (= 30). / 100). In addition, since 50 random numbers from “50” to “99” are assigned to the variation pattern E, the proportion of the variation pattern E selected when the probability variation is a big hit is 50% (= 50). / 100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the normal game state and selects 6R normal as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or the symbol random number is “0” to “3”. Is selected, the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern B from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B). If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “4” to “14”, the variation pattern C is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern C from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “15” to “46”, the variation pattern D is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern D from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “47” to “99”, the variation pattern E is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern E from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select.

  In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B), four random numbers “0” to “3” are assigned to the variation pattern B. For this reason, the rate at which the variation pattern B is selected when the jackpot is normally a big hit is 4% (= 4/100). In addition, since 11 random numbers “4” to “14” are assigned to the variation pattern C, the rate at which the variation pattern C is selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 11% (= 11). / 100). Also, since 32 random numbers “15” to “46” are assigned to the variation pattern D, the proportion of the variation pattern D being selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 32% (= 32). / 100). Further, since 53 random numbers from “47” to “99” are assigned to the variation pattern E, the proportion of the variation pattern E being selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 53% (= 53 / 100).

(Change pattern selection table for reach lose)
When determining that the jackpot game is not executed in the first special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform an effect with reach based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number. select. Specifically, whether to select any variation pattern from the variation pattern group in which the effect with reach is performed or whether to select any variation pattern from the variation pattern group in which the effect without reach is performed. decide. Here, when it is selected to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17C).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not executed in the normal game state and selects to perform the effect with reach, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the design random number, and the reach random number is “0” to If any of “39”, the variation pattern G is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern G from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “40” to “69”, the variation pattern H is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern H from the variation pattern selection table for reach lose. To do. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any of “70” to “89”, the variation pattern I is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern I from the variation pattern selection table for reach lose. To do. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “90” to “99”, the variation pattern J is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern J from the variation pattern selection table for reach lose. To do.

  In the variation pattern selection table for reach-losing (see FIG. 17C), 40 random numbers “0” to “39” are assigned to the variation pattern G. For this reason, when the reach effect is performed to notify the loss, the ratio of the variation pattern G being selected is 40% (= 40/100). In addition, since 30 random values of “40” to “69” are assigned to the variation pattern H, when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified, 30% (= 30/100). In addition, since 20 random numbers from “70” to “89” are assigned to the variation pattern I, the rate at which the variation pattern I is selected when performing the reach effect to notify the loss is as follows: 20% (= 20/100). In addition, since 10 random numbers of “90” to “99” are assigned to the variation pattern J, the ratio of the variation pattern J being selected when performing the reach effect to notify the loss is as follows: 10% (= 10/100).

  The main CPU 101 refers to one of the variation pattern selection tables in the variation pattern selection table illustrated in FIG. 17 based on the determination result on whether or not to execute the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination. Then, one of the variation patterns is selected from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for non-reach loss used for notifying reach without performing a reach effect is also prepared, and the main CPU 101 must execute a jackpot game. If the decision is made and the non-reach effect is selected, the fluctuation pattern is 3 seconds, the fluctuation time is 8 seconds, depending on the number of holds when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. One of the fluctuation patterns and the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds are selected.

  Further, as is clear from the comparison of the fluctuation pattern selection tables in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the fluctuation time when each fluctuation pattern is selected except for the fluctuation pattern A corresponds to the effect contents. . For example, when the variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot, when the variation pattern B is selected from the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot, the variation pattern G is selected from the variation pattern selection table for reach loss In this case, the change time of the special symbol is 20 seconds and only the normal reach is performed as the reach effect. The reason why such a configuration is adopted is that the effects until just before the hit notification effect or the lose notification effect is made common and the subsequent effects are made according to the determination result.

  On the other hand, in other embodiments, even if the contents of the performance until immediately before the winning notification are common for the three selection tables illustrated in FIGS. The variation time may be varied.

  The following can be said from the description of the three variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probabilistic big hit or a normal big hit, generally, a fluctuation pattern with a long variation time tends to be selected, and a variation pattern with a short variation time tends to be difficult to select (see FIG. 17 (A) and (B)). In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a long variation time, and it is easy to select a variation pattern with a short variation time (see FIG. 17 (C)). From these facts, it can be said that the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the hit notification effect, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier the loss notification effect is to be performed. In other words, when the reach effect is performed over a relatively long time, such as developing from the normal reach to the SPSP reach via the character SP reach, the hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and only the normal reach effect is performed. When the time required for a long reach effect is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification effect is easily executed. That is, instead of being notified of the winning in the normal reach production, it is better to develop from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, or from normal reach to character SP reach to SPSP reach. It can be said that the jackpot reliability is high.

<About bumping effects in the normal gaming state>
The following can be said about the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probable big hit, the ratio at which the bumping effect is executed is 10%, which is the same as the percentage in which the fluctuation pattern A is selected with reference to the probable big hit variation pattern selection table. (= 10/100). On the other hand, in the normal big hit variation pattern selection table and the reach loss variation pattern selection table, there is no variation pattern in which a bumping effect is performed (see FIGS. 17B and 17C).
For these reasons, the hit effect in the normal gaming state is a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and that it will surely shift to the probable game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that it is a promising jackpot notice. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the hit effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is finished (here, 100%) is controlled in the short-time game state. There is a feature that it is higher than the probability (0%).

  Also, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit (see FIG. 17A), when attention is paid to the variation pattern A having the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, the abrupt production is associated as the production content. Other effects are not associated. From this, it is clear that when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot and the variation pattern A is selected, the bumping effect that functions as the probability variation jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. It is.

  In addition, the ratio which the probability variation jackpot occupies with respect to the jackpot concerning the first special symbol determination is 60% (= 5% + 55%) (see FIG. 6B). In addition, the rate at which the abrupt effect is executed when the probability variation is a big hit is 10% (= 10/100). For this reason, when viewed as a whole when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the bumping effect is executed is 6% (= 0.6 × 0.1 × 100). .

  In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case where, when the hit effect is executed in the normal game state, the game state is shifted to the probability change game state with a probability of 100% after the jackpot game is finished. When the game is executed, the probability of transitioning to the probable game state after the jackpot game is set to a value less than 100% so that the game can be controlled in the short-time game state with a certain probability (for example, 20%) after the jackpot game ends. May be. In this case, when the hit effect is executed, the probability of shifting to the probability-changing gaming state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the short-time gaming state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probability-changing gaming The probability of transition to the state may be lower than the probability of transition to the time-saving gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the bumping effect is always executed when the variation pattern A is selected is described, but in another embodiment, the bumping effect is not performed even when the variation pattern A is selected. You may employ | adopt the structure that there exists. That is, when the variation pattern A is selected, the probability that the impact effect is executed is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. In the present embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern A is selected and the bumping effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

  The hit effect is an effect that functions as a probable jackpot notice. In this embodiment, after the hit effect is executed, a 16R jackpot game is executed and a 6R jackpot game is executed. There are cases. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when a hit effect is executed, a configuration is adopted in which a 16R jackpot game is executed while a 6R jackpot game is not executed. Also good. In other words, the sudden effect may be executed in the case of 16R probability change, and the sudden effect may not be executed in the case of 6R probability change.

<About the successful capture>
In the present embodiment, the character SP reach may be executed in the normal gaming state, while the character SP reach is not executed in the probability variation gaming state. For this reason, the successful take-off effect (see, for example, FIG. 13 (H)) that may be executed during the character SP reach may be referred to as a dedicated effect dedicated to the normal game state, which is not performed in the probability variation game state. it can. The following can be said about the successful take-off effect, which is a special effect in the normal gaming state.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot, the ratio of the variation pattern C in which the successful capture effect is performed is selected from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17A) is 8% (= 8/100). In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, the rate at which the variation pattern C in which the successful capture effect is performed is selected from the regular jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B) is 11%. (= 11/100). In the reach-losing variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17C), although a variation pattern H in which a capture failure effect is performed is prepared, a variation pattern in which a capture success effect is performed is not prepared. The same applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is losing and an effect without reach is performed.
From these facts, it can be said that the successful stealing directing is a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

  Further, as is apparent from the notations of the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17A) and the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot (see FIG. 17B), the successful take effect is the first special The jackpot relating to the symbol determination can be executed both in the case where the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot and in the case where the jackpot is a normal jackpot. That is, when the winning notification effect is performed following the successful take effect, the game may be controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is ended, or the game may be controlled in the normal gaming state. From this, it can be said that the successful take-off effect is an effect that does not suggest the game state after the end of the jackpot game, while notifying that the jackpot game will be executed. The player cannot determine whether the game is controlled in the probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game is finished or the game is controlled in the normal gaming state at the stage where the successful take-off effect is performed. You can enjoy the game while expecting to be controlled.

Note that the probability variation jackpot occupies 60% with respect to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and the variation pattern in which the successful capture effect is performed with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17A). The rate at which C is selected is 8%. For this reason, the probability that the game is controlled in the probabilistic gaming state after the successful winning game is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.8% (= 0.6 × 0.08 × 100).
On the other hand, the ratio of the normal jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 40%, and the variation pattern in which the successful take-off effect is performed with reference to the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot (see FIG. 17B). The rate at which C is selected is 11%. For this reason, the probability that the game is controlled in the normal gaming state after the successful winning game is performed and the jackpot game ends is 4.4% (= 0.4 × 0.11 × 100).
For these reasons, when a successful take-off effect is executed, there are cases where the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is finished, and the game is controlled in the normal game state. Is slightly higher than the latter probability.

  Further, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit (see FIG. 17A), when attention is paid to the variation pattern C whose variation time is 40 seconds, the capture success effect is associated with the effect content, There is no production that is not associated with a successful production. From this, it is clear that when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probable jackpot and the variation pattern C is selected, the successful capture effect that functions as a jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. is there.

  Further, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (B)), when attention is paid to the variation pattern C whose variation time is 40 seconds, the successful capture effect is associated with the effect content, There is no production that is not associated with a successful production. From this, it is clear that even when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a normal jackpot and the variation pattern C is selected, the successful takeover effect that functions as a jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. is there.

  In the present embodiment, a case where a capture success effect is always executed when the variation pattern C is selected will be described. However, in another embodiment, even if the variation pattern C is selected, the capture success effect is not performed. You may employ | adopt the structure that there exists. That is, when the variation pattern C is selected, the probability that the capture success effect is executed is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. In another embodiment, a configuration may be employed in which a successful take-off effect is executed when a probable big hit, whereas a successful take-off effect is not executed when a normal big win. That is, the successful take-off effect may be an exclusive effect for the probable big hit similar to the hit effect in the present embodiment. Conversely, a configuration in which a successful take-off effect is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, whereas a successful take-off effect is not executed in the case of a promising big hit may be adopted.

[Change pattern selection table to be used in the probable game state]
FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used for processing for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the probability variation gaming state.

  The main ROM 102 includes a probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18A) and a normal jackpot variation as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B) is stored. Here, the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probability variation jackpot” in the probability variation gaming state. The The normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “normal jackpot” in the probability variation gaming state. . A variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost is also prepared, but is not shown.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 18A, in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is associated with the variation pattern random number. In FIG. 18, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and variation pattern random number, the variation time of the second special symbol, the type of variation effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation effect pattern Specific production contents, a range that the variation pattern random number can take, and a ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the range that the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol can be set to “0” to “99”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the probability variation gaming state and selects 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 4R probability variation as the type of jackpot, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or symbol random number is “ If it is one of “0” to “29”, the variation pattern L is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern L from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “30” to “79”, the variation pattern M is read as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern M from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select. If the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “80” to “99”, the variation pattern N is read as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern N from the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit. select.

  In the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit (see FIG. 18A), 30 random values “0” to “29” are assigned to the variation pattern L. For this reason, the rate at which the variation pattern L is selected when the probability variation is a big hit is 30% (= 30/100). In addition, since 50 random numbers “30” to “79” are assigned to the variation pattern M, the proportion of the variation pattern M selected when it is a probable variation is 50% (= 50). / 100). In addition, since 20 random numbers “80” to “99” are assigned to the variation pattern N, the rate at which the variation pattern N is selected when the probability variation is big is 20% (= 20). / 100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the probability variation game state, and the 8R normal is selected as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or the symbol random number is “0” to “99”. Is selected, the variation pattern O is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern O from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B). In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B), since 100 random numbers from “0” to “99” are assigned to the variation pattern O, the normal jackpot The rate at which the variation pattern O is selected is 100% (= 100/100).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in the second special symbol determination that the jackpot game is to be executed, the main CPU 101 selects one of the variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 18 according to the type of the jackpot. Referring to, a variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

<About bumping effects in the probable gaming state>
The following can be said about the bumping effect performed in the probable gaming state. That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable big hit, the rate at which the bumping effect is executed is determined by the fluctuation pattern L referring to the probable big jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18A). It is 30% (= 30/100) which is the same as the selected ratio. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B), there is no variation pattern in which a bumping effect is performed (see FIG. 18B). The same applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost. For these reasons, the bumping effect in the probable gaming state is a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and that it will surely shift to the probable gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that it is a promising jackpot notice.

  Also, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit (see FIG. 18 (A)), when focusing on the variation pattern L with the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, the abrupt production is associated with the production content. Other effects are not associated. From this, it is clear that when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot and the variation pattern L is selected, the bumping effect that functions as the probability variation jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. It is.

  Note that the probability that the probability variation jackpot occupies the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60%, and the proportion that the sudden presentation effect is executed in the case of the probability variation jackpot is 30% as described above. For this reason, when viewed as a whole when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the bumping effect is executed is 18% (= 0.6 × 0.3 × 100). .

  In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which, when the bumping effect is executed in the probability-changing gaming state, the game transitions to the probability-changing gaming state with a probability of 100% after the jackpot game is finished. When the game is executed, the probability of shifting to the probability change game state after the jackpot game ends may be set to a value less than 100% so that the game can be controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends. In this case, when the hit effect is executed, the probability of shifting to the probability-changing gaming state may be higher than the probability of shifting to the short-time gaming state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probability-changing gaming The probability of transition to the state may be lower than the probability of transition to the time-saving gaming state.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a bumping effect is always performed if the fluctuation pattern L is selected, in other embodiment, even if the fluctuation pattern L is selected, the bumping effect is not performed. You may employ | adopt the structure that there exists. That is, when the variation pattern L is selected, the probability that the presentation effect is executed is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in this embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern L is selected and the bumping effect is executed is set to a higher value than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

<About rebirth production>
As is clear from the notation of FIG. 18A, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probable big hit, a revival effect (see FIG. 8J) is executed as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The variation pattern N may be selected. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, as is apparent from the notation of FIG. 18B, a variation pattern in which a rebirth effect is performed is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It will never be done. The same applies to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost. From these facts, it can be said that the resurrection effect performed in the probability variation gaming state is a probability variation jackpot notice in the same manner as the sudden impact effect.

  In addition, when the variation pattern L is selected, the struck effect is executed, but the revival effect is not executed. When the variation pattern N is selected, the revival effect is executed, but the bumping effect is not executed. From these facts, it can be said that the bumping effect and the resurrection effect in the probability variation gaming state are prohibited so that both are not performed within the same variation.

  Although not shown in FIG. 7, for example, at the end of SPSP reach, it is possible to execute a resurrection effect that pseudo-stops the three decorative symbols of the same pattern after pretending to be lost, even in the normal gaming state, This revival effect is subject to the same prohibition as in the probability variation gaming state so that when the variation pattern A is selected, it is not executed together with the bumping effect within the same variation.

Note that the probability variation jackpot occupies 60% with respect to the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and the variation pattern N in which the revival effect is performed with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 18A). The percentage at which is selected is 20%. For this reason, the probability that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the revival effect is performed and the jackpot game ends is 12% (= 0.6 × 0.2 × 100).
On the other hand, with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation big hit (see FIG. 18A), the ratio of the variation pattern L in which the impact effect is performed is 30%. For this reason, the probability that the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state after the hitting effect is performed and the jackpot game is over is 18% (= 0.6 × 0.3 × 100).
From these facts, it can be said that when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the bumping effect is executed is higher than the probability that the restoration effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the revival effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected will be described. However, in another embodiment, the revival effect may not be performed even if the variation pattern N is selected. You may employ | adopt the structure called. That is, when the variation pattern N is selected, the probability that the restoration effect is executed is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. In this embodiment, the probability that the variation pattern N is selected and the revival effect is executed is set higher than the probability that another variation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. In other embodiments, the magnitude relationship of these probabilities may be reversed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a revival effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected regardless of the type of probability variation jackpot in the probability variation gaming state, but in other embodiments, the 16R probability variation is performed. In the case of, the revival effect can be executed, while in the case of 8R probability change or 4R probability change, the revival effect may not be executed. That is, the revival effect may function as a jackpot notice dedicated to the 16R probability change.

[7 Symbol Reach Reliability (Normal Game State)]
FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a normal-time reach reach selection symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the same decorative design is falsely stopped in the left column and the right column and a reach is established, a predetermined reach effect is performed, but the “final reach symbol” is a hit notification effect Or the reach design displayed in the reach production performed just before a loss notification production is performed. For example, when the normal reach is performed and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed, the reach symbol displayed during the normal reach corresponds to the final reach symbol. Further, when the normal reach develops to the SPSP reach via the character SP reach, and the hit notification effect or the lose notification effect is performed following the SPSP reach, the reach pattern displayed during the SPSP reach effect is displayed. Corresponds to the final reach symbol.

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost, the sub reach 131 displays the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number in the normal state. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the lose reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19A).

  In the present embodiment, the range that the reach symbol selection random number can take is set to “0” to “99”. In the normal lose reach reach selection table (see FIG. 19A), 12 random numbers are respectively provided for 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols. Assigned. Also, 10 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random values are assigned to 7 symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the rate at which 1 symbol, 2 symbol, 4 symbol, 5 symbol, 6 symbol, 8 symbol, or 9 symbol is selected as the final reach symbol is 12%. (= 12/100), the ratio at which 3 symbols are selected is 10% (= 10/100), and the rate at which 7 symbols are selected is 6% (= 6/100).

  FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a normal 16R probability variation jackpot reach design selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. .

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the sub CPU 131 normally selects the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The last reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for time 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 19B).

  In the normal 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19B), 44 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 7 random numbers are assigned to the other decorative symbols. A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the proportion of 7 symbols selected as the final reach symbol is 44% (= 44/100), and other decorative symbols are selected. The ratio is 7% (= 7/100) in all cases.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram showing a normal 6R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “6R normal”. .

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the sub reach 131 normally selects the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. At time 6R, the final reach symbol is selected by reading from the normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19C).

  In the normal 6R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19C), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. This is because odd symbols function as probability variation symbols. On the other hand, 25 random numbers are allotted to even symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the proportion of each even symbol selected is 25% (= 25/100), and the proportion of odd symbols selected is 0. %.

From the reach symbol selection table illustrated in FIGS. 19A to 19C, the following can be said. In other words, in the normal-time reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19A), six random numbers are assigned to seven symbols, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. In this case, 7 symbols are selected as reach symbols at a rate of 6%. This means that even if reach is established with 7 symbols, a loss notification effect may be performed later.
On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “6R normal”, seven symbols are not selected as the reach symbol (see FIG. 19C), but the determination of the first special symbol determination When the result is “16R probability variation”, 7 symbols are selected as the reach symbol at a high rate of 44%.
As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”, it is easy to select 7 symbols as the reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. Since it is difficult to select 7 symbols as the reach symbols, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in which the reach is established with the 7 symbols in the normal gaming state is an effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability. In the case of “16R probability variation”, 7 symbols may be selected as the reach symbol.

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 19B, even if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, an odd symbol other than an even symbol or a seven symbol may be selected as a reach symbol. However, when these reach symbols are selected, the promotion effect (first half) and the promotion success effect described above based on FIG. 11 are performed, and finally a hit notification effect in which “777” doublets are aligned. Is done. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 11B, even if three decorative symbols other than the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped, the player can enjoy the game without losing the expectation for the 16R probability variation jackpot. .

[7 Symbol Reliability (Probability Game State)]
FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a reach change symbol selection table for probability change referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing”.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reach effect other than the battle reach is not performed in the probability variation gaming state, the reach symbol displayed during the battle reach corresponds to the final reach symbol in the probability variation gaming state.

  The sub CPU 131 acquires the reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is being changed. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the lose reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20A).

  In the probability change reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20A), 15 random numbers are assigned to 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols, respectively. . In addition, 5 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols and 5 symbols, respectively. And the random number value is not assigned to 7 symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss, the ratio of selecting one symbol, two symbols, four symbols, six symbols, eight symbols, or nine symbols as the final reach symbol is 15% (= 15 The ratio at which 3 or 5 symbols are selected is 5% (= 5/100), and the rate at which 7 symbols are selected is 0% (= 0/100).

  FIG. 19B is a diagram illustrating a reach symbol selection table for probability variation 16R probability variation jackpot that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. .

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the sub reach 131 changes the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the medium 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20B).

  In the probability variation 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20B), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 16 random values are assigned to 3 symbols. 10 random numbers are assigned to 5 symbols. Four random numbers are assigned to the other reach symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the proportion of 7 symbols selected as the final reach symbol is 50% (= 50/100), and the proportion of 3 symbols selected is 16% (= 16/100), the rate at which 5 symbols are selected is 10% (= 10/100), and the rate at which other decorative symbols are selected is 4% (= 4 / 100).

  FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating a probability variation 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “8R normal”. .

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol. If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the sub reach 131 changes the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the medium 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20C).

  In the probability changing 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20C), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. On the other hand, 40 random numbers are assigned to 4 symbols, and 20 random numbers are assigned to all other even symbols. For this reason, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the proportion of the four symbols selected is 40% (= 40/100), and the proportion of the other even symbols selected is any. 20% (= 20/100), and the proportion of odd-numbered symbols selected is 0%.

From the reach symbol selection table illustrated in FIGS. 20A to 20C, the following can be said. That is, in the probability changing 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (C)), random numbers are not assigned to the seven symbols, but the probability changing 16R probability jackpot reach symbol selection table (FIG. 20 ( In B), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. In the reach change selection table for probability change losing (see FIG. 20A), no random value is assigned to 7 symbols.
For these reasons, if a reach is established with 7 symbols in the probability variation gaming state, no loss will be notified after that, and the three decorative symbols showing the “777” double-eyed stop will be informed. Is done. In this sense, the 7 symbol reach in which the reach is established with 7 symbols in the probabilistic gaming state can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and the 7 symbols are aligned. Is a special effect of 16R probability variation, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in the probability variation gaming state is a probability variation jackpot notice.

  As is clear from the notation in FIG. 20B, even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, an odd symbol other than an even symbol or a seven symbol may be selected as a reach symbol. However, when these reach symbols are selected, a promotion effect similar to the promotion effect that is performed in the normal gaming state is performed, and a hit notification effect is finally performed in which all the “777” double eyes are aligned. Is called.

[Changes in reliability of 7 symbol reach]
As is clear from the description of the 7 symbol reach based on FIG. 19, the 7 symbol reach in the normal gaming state can be executed regardless of whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. Although the jackpot reliability is relatively high, the jackpot reliability is less than 100%. On the other hand, as is clear from the description of the 7 symbol reach based on FIG. 20, the 7 symbol reach in the probability variation gaming state can be executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”. However, it is an effect with a big hit reliability of 100% that is not executed in the case of “losing”. As is clear from these facts, even in the same 7 symbol reach, there is a difference in the jackpot reliability depending on the gaming state, and the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. The jackpot reliability changes from a value less than 100% to 100%.

  Note that the 7 symbol reach as a jackpot notice with a jackpot reliability of 100% is a special effect in the probability variation gaming state, and in the normal game state, a jackpot notice (for example, a bumping effect) different from this 7 symbol reach is performed. Is called.

[Various jackpot notices]
Hereinafter, various jackpot notices that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23 and 25 to 28. Here, FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot notices. FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the premier character effect. FIG. 23 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow title display. FIG. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of rainbow-colored character display. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of cut-in performed in response to an operation. FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one notification. FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the premier character effect is performed a plurality of times within the same variation.

  The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a premium character effect, a rainbow title display as a jackpot notice, in addition to the above-mentioned bumping effect and successful capture effect in the normal gaming state, the bumping effect in the probability-changing gaming state, and the 7 symbol reach. Rainbow-colored cut-in, rainbow-colored character display, and one-shot notification can be executed.

<Outline of Premier Character Production>
The premier character effect (see FIG. 22) is an effect of displaying an effect image indicating a specific character (hereinafter referred to as “premier character”) on the liquid crystal screen 5 and outputting the sound of the premier character from the speaker 24. FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which a spear character is displayed as a premier character, and that the spear character utters a voice “Do your best!”. This premier character production has a plurality of execution timings within the same variation. For example, the premier character production is executed during the contention production in the character SP reach (see FIG. 22A) or during the SPSP reach (see FIG. 22B). Is possible. This premier character does not appear when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”.

  Note that the number of types of premier characters is not limited to one, but multiple types of premier characters can be prepared to display one of the premier characters or display multiple premier characters at the same time. Also good. The premier character may be any character as long as it does not appear when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”.

<Outline of rainbow title display>
The rainbow title display (see FIG. 23) is an effect of displaying the reach title displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 with rainbow characters when a specific reach effect such as character SP reach or SPSP reach is started. This rainbow title display also has a plurality of execution timings within the same variation. In FIG. 23 (A), the reach title “Take back the treasure chest!” Is displayed in rainbow-colored characters prior to the start of the contention effect (see FIG. 7 (F-1)) with the character SP reach. The state of being done is illustrated. FIG. 23B illustrates a state in which the reach title “Destroy enemy boss!” Is displayed in rainbow characters at the start of SPSP reach.

  In addition, when this rainbow title display is not performed when a specific reach production such as character SP reach or SPSP reach is started, a blue title display for displaying the reach title in blue characters, or a reach title in red characters A red title is displayed (see FIG. 24). FIG. 24 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of blue title display and red title display. In the blue title display illustrated in FIGS. 24A and 24C, the reach title is displayed in blue characters, and in the red title display illustrated in FIGS. 24B and 24D, the reach title is in red characters. Is displayed. Note that the above three types of title display are images displayed on the entire screen, and are images having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen.

  Here, the blue title display is a title display indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 10%), and the red title display indicates that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. It is a title display (for example, a big hit reliability of 30%). These two types of title display (blue title display and red title display) can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and “lost”. In contrast, the rainbow color title display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. It is different from the above two types of title display in that it is not executed in some cases.

  In this embodiment, the case where the title display itself is performed in the normal gaming state but not in the probability variation gaming state will be described. However, even in the probability variation gaming state, for example, a similar title display or rainbow is targeted for battle reach. Color title display may be performed. Further, the color of the title display functioning as a jackpot notice is not limited to the rainbow color, and may be, for example, gold. Also, a specific pattern may be displayed around the title to function as a jackpot notice.

  Before displaying the title display, after displaying the blue display, red display, and rainbow title display in the order that the display area for the entire screen is small, these images are scrolled to display any title display. You may perform the production which expects whether it is actually displayed.

<Outline of Rainbow Character Display>
In the rainbow character display (see FIG. 25), characters displayed during a specific reach production such as character SP reach or SPSP reach (for example, lyrics displayed when a specific music is played) are displayed as rainbow characters. It is an effect displayed in color. FIG. 25A shows a state in which characters displayed during the contention effect in the character SP reach are displayed in rainbow colors. FIG. 25B shows a state in which characters displayed during SPSP reach are displayed in rainbow colors.

  When this rainbow-colored character display is not performed, blue character display for displaying characters in blue during the reach effect or blue character display for displaying characters in red during the reach effect may be performed. Here, the blue character display is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability is 15%), and the red character display is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. (For example, the jackpot reliability is 40%). Character display of these two types of colors can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and “lost”. In contrast, the rainbow-colored character display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. It is different from the above two types of character display in that it is not executed in some cases.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the character display itself is performed in the normal gaming state but not in the probability variation gaming state will be described, but even in the probability variation gaming state, for example, the same blue character display for battle reach, Red character display and rainbow color character display may be performed. The color of the character display functioning as a jackpot notice is not limited to the rainbow color, and may be, for example, gold.

<Overview of rainbow cut-in>
The rainbow cut-in (see FIG. 26) is an effect in which the operation-compatible effect described above based on FIG. 10 is performed using a rainbow effect image. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, at the end of the SPSP reach, the operation promotion effect described above based on FIG. 10 (H) is performed (see FIG. 26 (A)). On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the effective period, a blue cut-in (see FIG. 5) that superimposes a cut-in image with a blue effect on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. 26 (B)) is performed, and red cut-in (see FIG. 26 (C)) is performed in which a cut-in image with a red effect is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. There are cases. Here, the blue cut-in is considered to have a jackpot reliability of 10%, while the red cut-in has a jackpot reliability of 60%. When these two cut-ins are compared, Based on the difference between the color of the effect on the cut-in image and the number of characters included in the cut-in image, the player has a higher probability of jackpot reliability for the red cut-in than for the blue cut-in. Can be easily recognized.

  Note that these blue cut-in and red cut-in can be executed both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and “losing”. There is a feature that it is easy to execute when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” and difficult to execute when it is “big hit”. On the other hand, red cut-in has a feature that it is easy to execute when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and difficult to execute when “losing”. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots of 16R probability variation, 6R probability variation, and 6R normal are prepared as jackpots related to the first special symbol determination, but the blue cut-in and red cut-in are When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big jackpot”, it can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot. Note that a blue cut-in may be executed in the case of a loss, and a red cut-in or a blue cut-in may be executed in the case of a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability change”, when the player operates the upper key or the lower key of the effect key 27, the rainbow cut-in (see FIG. 26D). ) May be performed. This rainbow cut-in is an effect of superimposing and displaying a cut-in image with an rainbow effect on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and as illustrated in FIG. This is an effect that does not occur unless the player operates the up key or the down key within the effective period in the situation where the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation 26 is performed.

  When the sub CPU 131 acquires information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation” from the game control board 100 and sets an effect pattern for performing an operation promotion effect during the SPSP reach. In addition, it is also set whether the rainbow cut-in occurs when the up key or the down key is operated. For example, it may be set to generate a rainbow cut-in when the up key is operated while generating a blue cut-in or a red cut-in when the down key is operated. Further, for example, it may be set that a blue cut-in or a red cut-in is generated when the up key is operated while a rainbow cut-in is generated when the down key is operated.

  The rainbow cut-in may be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”, but may be executed when the determination result is “lost”. Absent. For this reason, the jackpot reliability of the rainbow cut-in is 100%.

  In addition, the rainbow cut-in in the present embodiment is a dedicated effect related to 16R probability variation. For this reason, even if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, if the type is “6R probability variation” or “6R normal” which is not “16R probability variation”, the up key is used within the effective period. Or even if the down key is operated, the rainbow cut-in does not occur. For this reason, even if the rainbow cut-in does not occur in response to the operation of the up key or the down key, the player can enjoy the game while expecting “6R probability change” or “6R normal”.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can execute cut-in in any of a plurality of effect modes, and cut-in in any one of the effect modes (the present embodiment). Then, “rainbow cut-in”) can be executed as a jackpot notice.

  When it is determined that the gaming machine 1 executes the jackpot game, there are a time when the blue cut-in is executed, a time when the red cut-in is executed, and a time when the rainbow color cut-in is executed. That is, in the case of jackpot, any cut-in of the three cut-ins can be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game, there is a time when the blue cut-in is executed and a time when the red cut-in is executed, but there is no time when the rainbow color cut-in is executed. . This is why the rainbow-colored cut-in functions as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice of the execution of the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”, and if the key assigned by the sub CPU 131 among the up key and the down key is operated within the effective period, 100% A case where rainbow cut-in occurs with probability will be described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in the above situation, when the assigned key is operated, an effect lottery using a random number for determining whether or not to generate a rainbow cut-in The rainbow color cut-in may be generated only when this effect lottery is won. Note that the winning probability may be 50%, for example. Thus, even if the necessary conditions for generating the rainbow cut-in were satisfied, the rainbow cut-in did not occur by preventing the rainbow cut-in from being generated at a certain rate. Even in this case, the player can continue to have the desire of “16R probability change”.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is obtained when the left key or the right key of the effect key 27 is operated during the effective period of the operation promotion effect in FIG. On the condition that it is “16R probability change”, there is a case where one notification (see FIG. 27) described later occurs.

  In the present embodiment, a case where rainbow color cut-in is performed using a cut-in image in which a rainbow effect is applied to an effect image including three characters will be described. However, this embodiment is used for cut-in functioning as a jackpot notice. The display mode of the cut-in image to be performed is not limited to this. In another embodiment, for example, a cut-in that displays a cut-in image indicating a golden character may be executed as a jackpot notice.

  In addition, regarding the configuration in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes, in another embodiment, a step-up effect is performed as the predetermined effect. Can be considered. This step-up effect is an effect that can be developed in stages up to a predetermined number of steps with a predetermined number of steps (for example, “5”) as the upper limit. The step-up effect to be performed may be executed as a reliability suggesting effect that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot, and the step-up effect that finally develops to step 5 may be executed as the jackpot notice.

  Further, in this embodiment, since a configuration in which cut-in occurs at the end of SPSP reach is adopted, a change pattern with a relatively short change time of the first special symbol that does not perform SPSP reach is selected. If this happens, no cut-in occurs. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration in which cut-in can occur at timings other than the last stage of SPSP reach is adopted. For example, a variation pattern such as variation pattern A or variation pattern B has a relatively short variation time. A rainbow cut-in may occur when the first special symbol is variably displayed.

(Outline of one announcement)
One notification (see FIG. 27) outputs a special effect sound that is not output when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” from the speaker 24 and emits the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 in rainbow colors. It is a production to make.

  In the present embodiment, this one-notification is an effect performed in the probability variation gaming state, but in other embodiments, one-notification may be performed even in the normal gaming state.

[Specific example of premier character production in probable gaming state]
FIG. 28 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the premier character effect is performed a plurality of times within the same variation. In FIG. 28A, the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. A state in which a loss notification effect in which a decorative symbol of a mode indicating that it is present is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as red hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the second corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. Special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, shift processing of each hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is performed and high-speed scroll display of decorative symbols is started (see FIGS. 28A and 28B). .

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 8R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y2 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed. If this happens, the following effects may be performed.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the second special symbol variation display is started, a reach that gives a player's expectation that 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. The establishment effect is performed (see FIG. 28C). When this reach establishment effect is being performed, a premier character effect may be performed. In FIG. 28C, an effect image showing a girl character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and a premier character effect is output in which the voice of the girl character “Ganbare! The state of being is illustrated. In this case, a character different from the premier character (the character of the niece) appearing in the premier character production performed in the normal gaming state is displayed, but the character common to the character displayed in the premier character production in the normal gaming state is displayed. May be displayed. The same applies to the case where the premier character effect is executed at an execution timing other than the reach establishment effect.

  In this way, after the premiere character effect is performed in accordance with the reach establishment effect, the reach is established when the decorative symbol common to the left symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 28D). When the reach is established, the title display for displaying the reach title related to the battle reach such as “Decisive Battle OOVS XXX” is performed. In this case, a premier character effect may also be performed (FIG. 28 ( E)). In FIG. 28 (E), the specific notation of the reach title is omitted, and the display position of the premier character is different from that at the time of reaching the reach establishment, but the display position of the premier character is It may be the same as at the time of establishment.

  In the final stage of the battle reach, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 is performed (see FIG. 28F). When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, a victory suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the player character has defeated the enemy character and won (see FIG. 28G). In this victory suggestion effect, the character “Destroy!” Indicating that the player character has defeated the enemy character is displayed and the sound is output, and the director 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three symbol rows displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a double eye (see FIG. 28G). If the player does not perform an operation within the effective period, the victory suggestion effect is automatically executed at the timing when the effective period ends, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “8R normal ”, A defeat suggestion effect is performed according to the operation or automatically.

  When the victory suggestion effect is performed as described above, the three decorative symbols that have been pseudo-stopped at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed large in a pseudo-stopped state at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 28 (H)). ) With the main stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols are fully stopped (see FIG. 28I).

  In this way, not only in the normal game state but also in the probability variation game state, a plurality of premier character effects can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Here, the case where the premier character effect is performed three times within the same variation of the second special symbol has been described as an example. However, the premier character effect may be performed twice within the same variation, and the same There may be a case where the premier character production is performed only once within the fluctuation.

[About features of each jackpot notice]
Hereinafter, the features of each jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. During the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, as a jackpot notice for definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed, a rush effect, a successful capture effect, a premier character effect, a rainbow title display, Color cut-in and rainbow-colored character display can be executed.

<Characteristics of bumping effects in normal gaming state>
The hit effect in the normal gaming state is an effect in which symbols are suddenly arranged without going through reach (see FIG. 14). This bumping effect is executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and the variation pattern A having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. (See FIG. 17 (A)). Note that, for the variation pattern A, there is no production pattern that does not perform the bumping effect, so the probability that the bumping effect is executed when the variation pattern A is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (See FIG. 21). Note that, unlike the premier character effect or the like, this hit effect has a feature that only one execution timing is prepared and appears only immediately after the start of the variation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the variation pattern A selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable variation big hit” is associated with the bumping effect in the table stored in the sub-ROM 132, but normally Among the variation patterns defined in the big hit variation pattern selection table, there is no variation associated with the hit effect (see FIG. 17B). For this reason, when the hit notification effect is performed following the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when a hit effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called “next notice” may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7 (K)), but this “next notice” suggests execution of SPSP reach. It is a production to do. On the other hand, the bumping effect is an effect in which symbols are suddenly arranged without going through reach. For this reason, when the “next notice” is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the abrupt effect is not executed. The same applies to the case where an effect or the like suggesting the establishment of reach is performed. In addition, since the “next notice” is not performed when it does not develop to SPSP reach, it is not necessarily executed during normal reach, but there is a production route that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach. Once the reach is established, the bumping effect will not be executed after that, so when the “next notice” is executed, the bumping effect will not be executed, compared to the bumping effect. Thus, it can be said that other reliability suggesting effects (for example, title display) are always executed, and other jackpot notices (for example, rainbow title display) are easily executed.

  Further, when the variation pattern A is selected, the effective period is not set, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A, the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 is irrelevant. At the end, there will be a production. For this reason, it can be said that the hit effect is a jackpot notice that can achieve an extremely high effect because the game is executed at an unexpected timing.

<Characteristics of successful capture in normal gaming state>
The successful take-off effect is a jackpot notice executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern C is selected (FIG. 17A and FIG. 17). (See (B)). In addition, since the variation effect pattern in which the successful capture effect is not performed is not prepared for the variable pattern C, the probability that the successful capture effect is executed when the variable pattern C is selected is the present embodiment. 100% (see FIG. 21). Note that the successful take-off effect is a special effect for the character SP reach, and is therefore only executed during the character SP reach. Further, the successful take effect has a feature that a jackpot notification is performed immediately after the successful take effect is executed (see FIGS. 13A, 13H, and 13I). In other words, when the successful take effect is performed, the jackpot notification is performed in the character SPSP reach without the reach effect being developed from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach (see FIG. 7).

  The capture success effect is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern C. For this reason, when the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A, the successful capture effect is performed together with the sudden effect. Absent. The same applies to other jackpot notices not associated with the variation pattern A.

  The variation pattern C can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and “normal big hit” (see FIGS. 17A and 17B). . For this reason, if a hit notification effect is executed immediately after the successful take effect and a jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, or the game is controlled in the normal game state There is.

  Further, since the character SP reach is a reach effect that is not executed in the probability change game state, the successful take effect is also not executed in the probability change game state.

<Characteristics of Premier Character Production in Normal Game State>
In this embodiment, the premier character production may appear in all reach production such as normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach. On the other hand, when the variation pattern A is selected, since the jackpot notice other than the bumping effect is not executed, the premier character effect is the variation pattern of the first special symbol for the jackpot, It can be said that this is a jackpot notice that can be executed when a variation pattern other than the variation pattern A is selected.

  The execution probability of the premier character effect varies depending on which change pattern is selected as the change pattern of the first special symbol for jackpot, but in this embodiment, the execution probability of the premier character effect is 5 The value is set within a range of ˜40% (see FIG. 29). For this reason, it can be said that it is a jackpot notice with a lower execution probability than the bumping effect executed when the variation pattern A is selected and the successful take-off effect executed when the variation pattern C is selected.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 22, the premier character effect may appear multiple times within the same variation, and in this embodiment, the premier character effect is 1 within the same variation of the first special symbol. There are a case where it is performed twice, a case where it is performed twice, and a case where it is performed three times.

  Further, the variation patterns B to E capable of executing the premier character effect can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and “normal big hit” (FIG. 17). (See (A) and (B)). For this reason, if a jackpot game is performed after the premiere character performance is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state and the game is controlled in the normal game state. May be.

<Characteristics of rainbow title display in normal gaming state>
The rainbow title display is a jackpot notice that displays the reach title related to the character SP reach or SPSP reach in rainbow color, and the change patterns C to E associated with the change patterns in which the character SP reach or SPSP reach is performed are associated. It can be executed when either one is selected.

  As is clear from the above, the execution timing of the rainbow title display is predetermined and may appear at the start of the character SP reach or at the start of the SPSP reach. When reach production develops to SPSP reach, rainbow title display may be performed both at the start of character SP reach and at the start of SPSP reach.

  Note that the execution probability of the rainbow title display varies depending on which variation pattern among the variation patterns C to E is selected, but in this embodiment, the execution probability of the rainbow title display is 5 to 15%. The value is set within the range. Specific execution probabilities of the above-described premier character effect, rainbow title display, rainbow cut-in, and rainbow character display will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the variation patterns C to E on which the rainbow title display can be executed can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and “normal big hit” (see FIG. 17 (A) and (B)). For this reason, if the jackpot game is performed after the rainbow title display is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, and the game is played in the normal game state. It may be controlled.

<Characteristics of rainbow cut-in in normal gaming state>
The rainbow cut-in is a jackpot notice that may appear at the end of SPSP reach production. For this reason, the rainbow title display can be executed when the variation patterns D and E associated with the variation effect pattern for performing the SPSP reach effect are selected as the variation effect pattern, and the execution probability of the change is determined according to which variation. Even if a pattern is selected, it is set to 5%.

  Further, as described above, the rainbow cut-in does not appear unless a predetermined operation (in this embodiment, the operation of the up key or the down key of the effect key 27) is performed. Further, the rainbow cut-in is characterized in that it appears only when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. These are as described above with reference to FIG.

<Characteristic of rainbow-colored character display in normal game state>
The rainbow-colored character display is a dedicated effect of these two types of reach effects that is performed during the character SP reach and the SPSP reach, and the change patterns C to C associated with the change effect patterns in which these reach effects are performed. This can be executed when one of E (see FIGS. 17A and 17B) is selected. In addition, although the execution probability of a rainbow color character display changes with the fluctuation | variation patterns selected, in this embodiment, it is set to the value settled in the range of 5-20%.

  Note that the rainbow-colored character display may be performed during the character SP reach or during the SPSP reach. For example, a change pattern in which a change effect pattern developed from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach is associated. Is selected, it may appear multiple times (for example, twice) within the same variation.

  Further, the variation patterns C to E on which the rainbow-colored character display can be executed can be selected both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and “normal big hit” (see FIG. 17 (A) and (B)). For this reason, when the jackpot game is performed after the rainbow-colored character display is performed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, and the game is played in the normal game state. It may be controlled.

  On the other hand, during the change display of the second special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state, as a jackpot notice that definitely announces that the jackpot game will be executed, a rush effect, one announcement, a premier character effect, 7 symbol reach It is feasible.

<Characteristics of bumping effects in probable gaming state>
The bumping effect in the probable gaming state is an effect in which symbols are suddenly arranged without going through reach (see FIG. 16). This bumping effect is executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and the variation pattern L having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 18 (A)). Note that, for the variation pattern L, there is no preparation pattern that does not perform the bumping effect, so the probability that the bumping effect is executed when the variation pattern L is selected is 100 in this embodiment. % (See FIG. 21). In addition, unlike the premier character effect in the probability variation game state, this bumping effect has only one execution timing, and appears only immediately after the start of the variation of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state. There are features.

  In addition, the variation pattern L selected when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probable large jackpot” is associated with the bumping effect, but is defined in the regular jackpot variation pattern selection table. There is no variation pattern associated with the impact effect (see FIG. 18B). For this reason, when the hit notification effect is performed following the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when a hit effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the variation pattern L is selected, the bumping effect is always executed. However, for example, in the probability variation gaming state, the second special symbol (or the first symbol) performed after the jackpot game is ended. The impact effect can be executed until the number of changes, which is the number of times the special symbol) is displayed, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 30 times), and after that, the impact effect is executed. You may make it not. This control can be realized, for example, by preventing the change pattern L from being selected after the number of changes reaches a predetermined value.

<Characteristics of one-shot notification in the probabilistic gaming state>
One notification is a jackpot notice in which a special effect sound is output from the speaker 24 with the rainbow light emission of the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37. This one notification is a jackpot notice that can be executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “16R probability variation” and the variation pattern M or the variation pattern N is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, it is set to be 15%. If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not “16R probability change”, one notification is not made. Therefore, when one notification is made, “16R probability change” becomes rich at that time. In this way, since the one notification performed in the probability variation gaming state is a special effect of “16R probability variation”, in this embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “8R probability variation”, In the case of “4R probability variation”, in the case of “8R normal”, one notification is not performed.

<Characteristics of 7 symbol reach in probabilistic gaming>
The 7 symbol reach functioning as a jackpot notice is a dedicated effect in the probability variation gaming state that can be executed when any one of the variation patterns L to N is selected. That is, the 7 symbol reach in the normal gaming state has no function as a jackpot notice because the jackpot reliability is less than 100%. This 7 symbol reach is selected only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. Therefore, when reach is established for 7 symbols, “16R probability variation” becomes rich.

[About jackpot notice type selection table]
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table. The sub-ROM 132 displays a jackpot notice other than the jackpot notice associated with a variation pattern such as a bumping effect in the normal gaming state, a successful takeover effect in the normal gaming state, a bumping effect in the probability-changing gaming state, and a 7-pattern reach in the probability-changing gaming state. A jackpot notice type selection table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute is stored.

  The jackpot notice type selection table includes a first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29A), a second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), and a third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29). (See (C)), and a fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D).

(First jackpot notice type selection table)
The first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (A)) is obtained when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Referenced when deciding whether to execute a jackpot notice.

  When the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notice, and the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot notice random number It is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice by reading the notice type from the first jackpot notice type selection table. In the present embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot notice random number is set to “0” to “99”.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 21, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the variation pattern B is selected is only the premier character effect. For this reason, in the first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29A), “Premiere character effect” and “Premier character effect” are defined as the jackpot notice type, and “Premier character effect is present”. Forty random number values are assigned to “No premiere character effect” and 60 random number values are assigned to “No premier character effect”.

  For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern B is selected, the probability that the “premier character effect” is read and the premier character effect is executed is 40% (= 40/100).

(Second jackpot notice type selection table)
The second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B) shows that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Referenced when deciding whether to execute a jackpot notice.

  When the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notice, and the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot notice random number By reading the notice type from the second jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 21, when the variation pattern C is selected, there are three types of jackpot notices that can be executed in addition to the successful capture effect: the premium character effect, the rainbow title display, and the rainbow character display. is there. For this reason, in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), “Premier character production”, “Premium character production”, “Rainbow title display”, “Rainbow title display”, “Rainbow character display” and “Rainbow character display” are defined.

  In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), 10 random numbers are assigned to “Premier character effect” and 90 random numbers are assigned to “Premier character effect”. A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, the probability that the “premier character effect” is read and the premier character effect is executed with the variation of the variation pattern C is 10% (= 10/100).

  Further, in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), 15 random numbers are assigned to “rainbow title display”, and “rainbow title display not”. 85 random numbers are assigned. For this reason, the probability that “rainbow title display is present” is read and the rainbow title display is executed with the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern C is 15% (= 15/100).

  In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), 20 random values are assigned to “rainbow color character display”, and “rainbow color character display” is not assigned. 80 random numbers are assigned. For this reason, the probability of executing “rainbow color character display” and executing rainbow color character display with the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern C is 20% (= 20/100).

  In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), a common random number value is assigned to “Premier character effect” and “Rainbow title display”. Therefore, when the acquired jackpot notice random number is “64”, for example, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern C, both the premier character effect and the rainbow title display are performed. It will be. This is the same for the premier character effect and the rainbow color character display, and also for the rainbow color title display and the rainbow color character display.

(Third jackpot notice type selection table)
In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is the variation pattern of the first special symbol. When is selected, it is referred when deciding whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

  When the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot warning random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot warning, and the jackpot Whether or not to execute the jackpot notice is determined by reading the jackpot notice type corresponding to the notice random number from the third jackpot notice type selection table.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 21, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the variation pattern D or the variation pattern E is selected includes the premier character effect, the rainbow color title display, the rainbow color cut-in, and the rainbow color character display. There are four types. For this reason, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), “Premier character production”, “Premier character production”, “Rainbow title display”, “Rainbow title display”, “Rainbow color cut-in”, “No rainbow color cut-in”, “Rainbow character display”, and “Rainbow character display” are defined.

  In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), five random values are assigned to “Premier character effect” and 95 random numbers are assigned to “Premier character effect”. A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, the probability that the “premier character effect” is read and the premier character effect is executed by the variation of the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).

  Further, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), five random values are assigned to “rainbow title display”, and “rainbow title display not”. 95 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that “rainbow title display is present” is read and the rainbow title display is executed by the variation of the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).

In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), five random values are assigned to “rainbow cut-in”, and “rainbow cut-in” is not assigned. 95 random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that “rainbow color cut-in” is read and the rainbow color cut-in is executed by the variation of the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).
However, since the rainbow cut-in is not executed unless the jackpot relating to the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”, even if it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in is performed, Even if the key or the down key is operated, the rainbow cut-in is not performed.

  In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), five random number values are assigned to “rainbow character display” and “rainbow color character display” is not assigned. 95 random numbers are assigned. For this reason, the probability that “rainbow color character display is present” is read and the rainbow color character display is executed by the variation of the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 20% (= 20/100).

  In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), the execution probabilities of the premier character effect, the rainbow title display, the rainbow cut-in, and the rainbow character display are all 5%. However, these execution probabilities may be different from each other, or only one or two execution probabilities may be different.

  In addition, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C), as in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29B), a part of the common bonus for a plurality of jackpot notices is displayed. A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), a plurality of jackpot notices may be combined.

(4th jackpot notice type selection table)
In the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probable variation jackpot”, and the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is the variation pattern of the second special symbol. ) Is selected, it is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

  When the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires a jackpot notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notice, and the jackpot Whether or not to execute the jackpot notice is determined by reading the jackpot notice type corresponding to the notice random number from the fourth jackpot notice type selection table.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 21, when the variation pattern M or the variation pattern N is selected, there are two types of jackpot notices that can be executed other than the seven symbol reach, one announcement and a premier character effect. For this reason, in the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D), “single notice”, “no notice”, “premier character effect”, and “premier character effect” are defined. Has been.

  In the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D), 15 random values are assigned to “with one announcement”, and 85 random numbers are assigned to “without one announcement”. A numeric value is assigned. For this reason, the probability that “one notification is present” is read and one notification is executed with the variation of the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (= 15/100).

  In addition, since the single announcement is a special effect of “16R probability variation”, even if the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is “probability variation jackpot”, it is “8R probability variation” or “4R probability variation”. Does not execute a single notification even if “single notification is present” is read.

  In the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D), 15 random numbers are assigned to “Premier character effect” and 85 “Premier character effect”. A random value of is assigned. For this reason, the probability that the “premier character effect” is read and the premier character effect is executed with the variation of the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (= 15/100).

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state is “8R normal”, the probability variation gaming state ends and the game is controlled in the short time gaming state. For this reason, the “8R normal” related to the second special symbol determination cannot be said to be a very favorable jackpot for the player, and if a jackpot notice is given for such a jackpot, the player is uncomfortable, On the contrary, there is a possibility that the production effect will be reduced.

  For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot notice type selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “8R normal” is not prepared.

[About the execution timing of each performance in the normal gaming state]
Next, the execution timing of each effect in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 30 is a time chart showing a specific example of the effect in the normal gaming state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 30A, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and the variation pattern A is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol is started about Until 2 seconds elapse, the liquid crystal screen 5 is subjected to high-speed fluctuation in which the three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom at a high speed, and accordingly, a darkening effect (see FIG. 14C) is produced. Done. Then, following the darkening effect, the hitting effect described above is executed for about 3 seconds, and the hit notification effect for notifying the probable big hit is performed as the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped as the first special symbol. Is called.

  In this way, when the variation pattern A (see FIG. 17A) with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, the effect of informing reach establishment that can be executed when another variation pattern is selected. , Normal reach, character SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. are not executed.

  Further, the bumping effect in the normal gaming state is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern A. For this reason, when another variation pattern such as the variation pattern C is selected, the bumping effect is not executed. Conversely, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern A, the jackpot notice that is executed when the first special symbol is variably displayed in another variation pattern is not executed. .

  As illustrated in FIG. 30B, when the variation result C of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern C having a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol During the period from the start to the reach, the pre-reach effect is performed. This pre-reach effect is composed of high-speed fluctuation that scrolls three symbol rows from top to bottom at high speed, and low-speed variation that gradually lowers the scroll speed of each symbol row and pseudo-stops the left and right symbols. The high-speed fluctuation, which is the production of the first half of the pre-reach production, is common to the high-speed fluctuation performed when the fluctuation pattern A is selected.

  As is clear from this, when the variation pattern A is selected, a sudden impact effect occurs while the high-speed variation of the symbol sequence common to the case where the other variation pattern is selected is performed. To do. For this reason, it is possible to make the player who has predicted that the effect of reaching reach will be performed by lowering the scroll speed from now on, and to obtain a high effect.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30 (B), the pre-reach production is performed as described above, the reach is established, the normal reach evolves into the character SP reach, and the successful take-off production follows the contention production during the character SP reach. Immediately thereafter, a hit notification effect accompanying the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Here, the successful take effect is an effect that functions as a jackpot notice as described above. However, the sudden effect is 5 seconds, which is the change time of the change pattern A after the start of the change display of the first special symbol. This is different from the abrupt effect in that it is performed after a very long time of 5 seconds or more, 31 seconds, whereas it is performed before the time elapses.

  By the way, if the bumping effect is not performed even after 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern L, has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the player has a sense of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot notice. There is a possibility that it will gradually decrease. On the other hand, when the variation pattern L is selected, 5 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and 40 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern M, have elapsed. By performing the premier character production as a jackpot notice, the player can be surprised and a high production effect can be obtained.

  When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation pattern H (see FIG. 17C) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the pre-reach effect, normal reach, and character SP This is different from the case where the variation pattern C is selected in that a common effect such as a reach title display and a contention effect is executed, and a capture failure effect is performed instead of a capture success effect. That is, when the variation pattern C is selected and when the variation pattern H is selected, a common effect common to each other is executed, but when the variation pattern C is selected, Both are different in that the jackpot notice (here, the successful take-off effect) is performed, but when the variation pattern H is selected, the common effect is executed without the jackpot notice being executed. To do.

  In addition, the bumping effect in the normal gaming state is an effect configured to end within 5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For this reason, when the variation pattern C having a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, even if it is a probable big hit, no sudden effect is performed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 30C, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern E is selected, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern E. Accordingly, pre-reach production (consisting of high speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed. Here, as compared with the effect executed when the variation pattern C is selected, it is common in that the effect before reach, the normal reach, the title display, and the contention effect are executed. On the other hand, effects that are not executed in the variation pattern C such as the contention failure effect and the SPSP reach are executed.

  Further, FIG. 30C shows that the rainbow cut-in is executed in response to the operation for the operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach, but the change pattern A is selected when the variation pattern A is selected. The time (2 seconds) from the start of the variation display of one special symbol until the jackpot notice (crash effect) is executed, and when the variation pattern C is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The time from when the jackpot notice (capture success effect) is executed (31 seconds), and when the change pattern E is selected, the first special symbol change display starts and the jackpot notice (rainbow cut-in) ) Is executed (79 seconds (= 40 seconds + 39 seconds)). In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern E, the abrupt effect or the successful take-off effect is not performed.

  Further, as is clear from the comparison between the notation of FIG. 30A and the notation of FIG. 30B, the hit notification effect is executed after the hit effect is executed according to the selection of the variation pattern A. The time (third time) is 3 seconds, while the time (fourth time) from when the successful capture effect is executed according to the selection of the variation pattern C until the hit notification effect is executed is 9 Second, and the third time and the fourth time are different from each other. Here, since the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it can be said that the effect of causing the player to feel that the abrupt effect is suddenly a big hit is higher than the successful capture effect.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the third time is shorter than the fourth time will be described. However, in another embodiment, the third time may be longer than the fourth time.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern A is selected, the impact effect is performed at the first execution timing immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, the premier character effect that can be executed when a change pattern other than the change pattern A is selected is executed during the contention effect of the character SP reach (see FIG. 22A: an example of the second timing). It differs from the bump effect in that it may be executed during SPSP reach (see FIG. 22B: an example of the third timing).

  Since the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can execute a hitting effect in which the execution timing and the number of executions are fixed and a premier character effect in which the number of executions and the execution timing are variable, the jackpot notice becomes monotonous. Can be suppressed, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

[Execution timing of each effect in the probable gaming state]
Next, the execution timing of each effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 31 is a time chart showing a specific example of the effect in the probability variation gaming state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 31A, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and the variation pattern L is selected, the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Until one second has passed, the liquid crystal screen 5 is subjected to high-speed fluctuations in which three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom at a high speed, and accordingly, a darkening effect (see FIG. 16C) is produced. Done. Then, following the darkening effect, the hitting effect described above is executed over about 4 seconds, and as one of the big special symbols Y1 to Y3 stops as the second special symbol, the hit notification that notifies the probability variation big hit. Production is performed.

  In this way, when the variation pattern L (see FIG. 18A) with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, the effect of informing reach establishment that can be executed when another variation pattern is selected. The feature is that battle reach is not executed.

  Further, the bumping effect in the probability variation gaming state is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern L. For this reason, when another variation pattern such as the variation pattern M is selected, the bumping effect is not executed. Conversely, when the second special symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern L, the jackpot notice that is executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed with another variation pattern is not executed. .

  When the variation pattern L is selected, the impact effect may be started almost simultaneously with the start of the high-speed variation of the decorative pattern without executing the darkening effect. In the present embodiment, the case where the variation time is common between the variation pattern A selected in the normal gaming state and the variation pattern L selected in the probability variation gaming state will be described. In embodiments, these varying times may be different. That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A may be shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, or the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A may be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L.

  As illustrated in FIG. 31 (B), when the variation result M with the variation time of 40 seconds is selected as the determination result of the second special symbol determination and the variation time is 40 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol From the start of the display until the reach is established, the pre-reach effect is performed. This pre-reach effect is composed of high-speed fluctuation that scrolls three symbol rows from top to bottom at high speed, and low-speed variation that gradually lowers the scroll speed of each symbol row and pseudo-stops the left and right symbols. The high-speed fluctuation that is the first half of the pre-reach effect is common to the high-speed fluctuation that is performed when the fluctuation pattern L is selected.

  As is clear from this, when the variation pattern L is selected, a sudden impact effect is generated in the middle of high-speed variation of the symbol sequence common to the case where the other variation pattern is selected. To do. For this reason, it is possible to make the player who has predicted that the effect of reaching reach will be performed by lowering the scroll speed from now on, and to obtain a high effect.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 31B, the pre-reach effect is performed as described above, reach is established, battle reach is started, and the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of this battle reach, and the effect button 26 A victory suggestion effect is executed in response to the operation (see FIG. 15). Here, as illustrated in FIG. 31 (B), when the operation promotion effect is performed, a premier character effect as a jackpot notice may be performed. This is 30 seconds (= 10 seconds + 30 seconds), which is 5 seconds or more, compared to 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. This is different from the bumping effect in that it is performed after a very long time.

  Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “probable big hit” and the variation pattern N (see FIG. 18A) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the pre-reach effect is changed to the battle reach. After the operation promotion effect is performed during this battle reach, the defeat suggestion effect is performed, and after appearing to be lost, the resurrection effect is performed and the victory suggestion effect is performed. When the effect performed on the variation pattern N is compared with the effect performed on the variation pattern L, it is common in that high-speed variation of the three symbol sequences is performed. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern N is different in that the battle reach, operation promotion effect, defeat suggestion effect, defeat suggestion effect, revival effect, victory suggestion effect, etc. that are not performed for the change pattern L are performed. Yes.

  In addition, the bumping effect in the probability variation gaming state is an effect configured to end within 5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol. For this reason, when the variation pattern N having a variation time of 50 seconds is selected, although it is a probable big hit, no sudden effect is performed.

  FIG. 31 (C) shows that one notification is made immediately after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern L is selected, the variation of the second special symbol is shown. The time (1 second) from when the display is started until the jackpot notice (crash effect) is executed, and when the change pattern M is selected, the change display of the second special symbol is started and the jackpot notice ( The time (30 seconds) until the premier character production) is executed, and when the change display of the second special symbol is started when the change pattern N is selected, until the jackpot notice (one notification) is executed Are different from each other (here, approximately 0 seconds). In addition, when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern N, the bumping effect is not performed.

[About the reliability of pre-production]
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the hold icon. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-effect may be performed as an effect that displays a special icon as a hold icon and suggests a jackpot reliability. In the gaming machine 1, when the first special symbol determination is put on hold, a preliminary determination process for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game may be executed. Specifically, based on the jackpot random number acquired in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11, is it determined as “big hit” when the first special symbol determination is made? It is determined beforehand whether or not. Also, which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is variably displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, etc. Is also determined in advance. And based on these prior determination results, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-production and in which color the display color of the hold icon is to be set when the pre-production is executed. In response, the pre-production is executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 32, the effect of displaying the normal icon as the hold icon without performing the advance effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot reliability is 1%. On the other hand, when a pre-stage effect is executed, the hold icon may be displayed in blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colors, but the jackpot reliability of the pre-stage display that displays the blue hold icon is about 5%. It is. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the pre-production that displays the green hold icon is about 10%, and the jackpot reliability of the pre-production that displays the red hold icon is about 50%. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the pre-production that displays the golden hold icon is about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the pre-display that displays the rainbow-colored hold icon is 100%.

  From these things, first, it can be said that the pre-production that displays the rainbow-colored hold icon has a function as a jackpot notice for notifying that the jackpot game is executed. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed in a display color other than the rainbow color, the pre-effect does not function as a jackpot notice that definitely predicts that the jackpot game will be executed. When displayed in color, the pre-effects function as a jackpot notice.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a prior determination result indicating that, when the first special symbol determination is executed, a variation pattern of the first special symbol at which a normal reach effect is to be performed is selected. If it is not obtained, it is configured such that a pre-production that displays a blue hold icon is not executed. That is, when a prior determination result indicating that a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to a non-reach effect is selected is obtained, a pre-effect that displays a blue hold icon is not performed.

  The same applies to the pre-production that displays green hold, red hold, money hold, and rainbow hold, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which at least one of the character SP reach and the SPSP reach is executed. If a pre-determination result indicating selection is not obtained, a configuration in which a pre-production that displays a green or higher hold icon is not performed is employed.

  Note that the jackpot notice performed in the normal gaming state can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “hit”, but can be executed when it is “lost”. Absent. For this reason, it can be said that the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed when the preliminary presentation is performed than when the preliminary presentation in which the hold icon is displayed in a color of blue or more is not performed. For this reason, by executing the pre-production, the player is made aware of the appearance of the jackpot notice in the change (the change display of the first special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination being held). It can be expected effectively. In addition, when a prior performance is performed, it is easy to be executed in a performance mode with a high degree of reliability (an expectation level to shift to a probabilistic gaming state when the jackpot expectation level and the jackpot level are expected). It may be executed in a high production mode.)

  By the way, the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state is not executed unless the fluctuation pattern A in which the fluctuation time for which the reach effect is not executed is 5 seconds is selected. For this reason, when a prior effect that is executed only when a normal reach effect is to be performed is performed, the bump effect is not performed with the change. Therefore, it can be said that the prior effect is an effect that denies the appearance of the sudden effect.

  In other words, when a pre-effect that displays a blue or higher hold icon is executed, the probability that another jackpot notice will be executed is higher than the probability that the bump effect is executed (0% in this embodiment). It can be said.

  In addition, when the white hold icon is displayed without performing the pre-production, basically, the player can hardly expect the jackpot. However, in the present embodiment, when a prior effect is not performed, there is a possibility that an abrupt effect will be executed. On the other hand, when a prior effect is performed, there is no possibility that an abrupt effect will be performed. Can expect the appearance of jackpot notice. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot notice to appear both in the case of not executing the preliminary presentation and in the case of executing the preliminary presentation.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the prior effect based on a prior determination result is an icon change effect which displays the hold icon of the display mode different from normal, the prior effect is a prior determination result. Other effects may be used as long as the effects are based. For example, the pre-effect may be a chance eye effect that stops and displays a specific combination of decorative symbols called a so-called chance eye at the time of the loss notification effect before the change starts. The prior effect may be a mode transition effect that changes the effect mode from the normal effect mode to a specific effect mode (called a zone) based on the prior determination result.

[Various screens displayed when waiting for customers]
FIG. 33 is a screen diagram illustrating a customer waiting menu screen. The gaming machine 1 shifts to a so-called customer waiting state when the symbol change display is not performed in a state where the right of the special symbol determination is not reserved. When a set time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the transition to the customer waiting state, a customer waiting menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 33A). As illustrated in FIG. 33A, this customer waiting menu screen is displayed in this embodiment with an image that suggests that the occurrence rate of the jackpot notice can be selected by operating (pressing) the effect button 26, and the effect key 27. Includes an image that suggests that the volume can be set by operating (pressing) the left key or the right key, and an image that indicates that the amount of light can be set by operating (pressing) the up key or the down key of the effect key 27. It is configured as follows.

  When the player operates the left key or the right key of the effect key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a volume setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33B is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33B, the volume setting screen includes an image indicating the current volume, an image indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left key or the right key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. And an image indicating that the display of the volume setting screen ends when the button is operated.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the left key of the effect key 27 while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume can be decreased, and conversely, the volume can be increased by operating the right key. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24 in five stages. FIG. 33B shows the third stage of the five levels. The state set to is shown.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the up key or down key of the effect key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, a light amount setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33D is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33D, the light amount setting screen includes an image indicating the current light amount, an image indicating that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the up key or the down key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. And an image indicating that the display of the light amount setting screen is ended when the button is operated.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the upper key of the effect key 27 while the light amount setting screen is displayed, the light amount can be increased, and conversely, the volume can be decreased by operating the lower key. . Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the light amount of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in three steps, and FIG. 33D shows one of the three light amounts. The state set to the eye (minimum) is shown.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 in a state where the customer waiting menu screen (see FIG. 33A) is displayed, a jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33C is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33C, the jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen includes two selection items (“normal” and “significantly UP”) regarding the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, and the left key or right key of the production key 27 An image indicating that the cursor can be moved with respect to two selection items when the key is operated, and an image indicating that selection regarding the occurrence rate of the jackpot notice can be determined by operating the effect button 26 are configured.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set either the “normal mode” in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is relatively low, or the “big hit notice up mode” in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is relatively high.
FIG. 33C illustrates a state in which the cursor is positioned at “normal” of the two selection items “largely UP” and “normal”, and “normal” is highlighted. . On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 in this state, it is determined that “normal” is selected, and the “normal mode” is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to information indicating “normal mode”.
On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 33C, when the player operates the left key of the production key 27 while the cursor is positioned at “normal”, the cursor moves to “significantly UP” “Large UP” will be highlighted. When the player operates the effect button 26 in this state, it is determined that “significant UP” has been selected, and the “hit-up notice up mode” is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to information indicating the “hit-up notice advance mode”.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player arbitrarily changes the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24, and the light amount of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is possible.

[About the appearance rate of jackpot notice]
Next, the appearance rate of jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to the “normal mode” or the “hit jacking up mode” with respect to the appearance rate of the jackpot notice. When the “normal mode” is set, whether or not to execute each jackpot notice is determined with reference to the aforementioned jackpot notice type selection table based on FIGS. 29 (A) to (D). On the other hand, when the jackpot notice up mode is set, each jackpot notice is executed with reference to the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIGS. 34 (A) to (D). It is determined whether or not to do so.

  The process of determining whether or not to execute each jackpot notice using each jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed by referring to FIGS. 29 (A) to (D). Since it is the same as the process of determining whether to execute, detailed description here is omitted.

  When the jackpot notice type selection table exemplified in FIG. 29 is compared with the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode exemplified in FIG. 34, it corresponds to “present” of each notice effect. The number of random numbers attached is different. Specifically, in the jackpot notice type selection table for each jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. 34, for the jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. The number of random numbers associated with each other is doubled. For this reason, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is approximately doubled by setting the “big hit notice up mode” as compared to when the “normal mode” is set.

  In this example, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is doubled. However, how much the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased can be changed as appropriate. For example, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased by 10 times. A table for the jackpot notice up mode may be prepared. In addition, here, the case where the appearance rate of each jackpot notice is uniformly doubled has been described as an example. However, in other embodiments, for example, while the appearance rate of the premier character effect is increased by 5 times, The rate of increase in the appearance rate may be varied depending on the type of the notice effect, such as increasing the appearance rate of the notification by 10 times.

  By the way, as is clear from the above description based on FIGS. 17 and 18, the hit effect and the successful take effect performed in the normal game state and the hit effect performed in the probability variation game state are the types of jackpot notice Execution / non-execution is determined without using a selection table. Then, the variation effect pattern table (corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation effect pattern) stored in the sub ROM 132, which is used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot notice, Even if the jackpot notice up mode is set, it is not switched to another table. For this reason, for the bumping effect and the successful takeover effect performed in the normal gaming state, and the bumping effect performed in the probability-changing gaming state, even if the jackpot notice up mode is set, The appearance rate does not change as noticed.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 103]
FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various types of information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 35A, the main RAM 103 is determined as a storage area for storing acquisition information acquired when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. Storage area 1030, first reserved storage area 1031, second reserved storage area 1032, third reserved storage area 1033, fourth reserved storage area 1034, first reserved storage area 1035, second reserved storage area 1036, third reserved A storage area 1037 and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas for storing various information related to the first special symbol determination, and the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are the second storage areas. This is a storage area for storing various information related to special symbol determination. In addition, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. For this reason, in the determination storage area 1030, when the special symbol determination is performed, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted, and the first When only the special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 35 (B), the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas acquired by the main CPU 101 for storing jackpot random numbers, areas for storing design random numbers, areas for storing reach random numbers, It includes an area for storing a variation pattern random number, an area for storing advance determination information that is information indicating a determination result, and the like. That is, the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas for storing information for holding the right of special symbol determination.

  The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed.

  The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 40) described later based on the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information is information indicating whether or not the winning start information, the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot if it is a jackpot, It includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 with the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area. Information indicating whether or not the game ball has been acquired by winning the second start port 12. The pre-determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

  The five pieces of information described based on FIG. 35B are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 every time a game ball wins the first start port 11. Every time a game ball wins in the second start port 12, it is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in order from the first reserved storage area 1035.

  For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the five pieces of information are: It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the five pieces of information Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

  Further, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is performed, the information is stored in the reserved storage areas after the second reserved storage area 1032. Information is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second Information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are held, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. If stored, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is preferentially performed prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

  By the way, even when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when a game ball is won at the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 during a jackpot game and various random numbers are acquired, a special symbol determination or a special symbol is displayed. The variable display cannot be made immediately.

  For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired in such a situation, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired various random numbers or the like as information for suspending the right of special symbol determination as described above. -1038 in any area. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not variably displayed, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the game is not in the big hit game, the main CPU 101 obtains various random numbers obtained with the start opening prize as a trigger. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area 1030.

  Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can hold the right of special symbol determination when the special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 36 and thereafter is performed according to a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal design random number (step S1).

  The jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are as described above, and the normal design random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the ordinary design random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number is returned to “0” and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process including a process of acquiring various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from the switches (step S2). This switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbols on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then displays the special symbol determination result. The special symbol process including the process of stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5).

  Subsequent to the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big win in the process of step S3, the main prize opening control process for controlling the special prize opening control unit 117 to open the special prize opening 13 is performed. Execute (Step S6).

  Subsequent to the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

  Subsequent to step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S7. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. For the random number (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number), the first start port switch process including the process of acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input is executed. (Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is received for various random numbers that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A second start port switch process including a process of acquiring a value at the time of input is executed (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first gate switch 114 (or the second gate switch 115), and uses the first gate switch for the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A gate switch process for acquiring a value at the time when the detection signal from 114 (or the second gate switch 115) is input is executed (step S23).

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 38, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (specifically, the first start port switch 111 is “ON”) following the random number update process in step S1. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the first start port switch 111 has been turned ON is determined (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (step S <b> 210: YES), the first special symbol determination hold number U <b> 1 stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) of the first special symbol determination (step S211).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S212), and the first special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

Thus, various acquisition information such as a big hit random number is acquired in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” in a state where the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1.
When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. When various random numbers are acquired in step 1, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

  Following the processing of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S217). The main RAM 103 stores a time-saving game flag. At this time, the short game flag is set to “OFF” when the electric tulip 17 is controlled in a state where it is difficult to win the game ball at the second start port 12, and conversely, the game ball is likely to win the second start port 12. This flag is set to “ON” when the electric tulip 17 is controlled to the state. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF”, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process (step S218). Specifically, prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 43), which will be described later, whether or not the jackpot is based on the acquired information acquired by the processes of steps S213 to S216. Is determined in advance, and pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218 or determines that the high base state is set (the time-short game flag is set to “ON”) (step S217: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol determination. Such a hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained by the process of step S218, and the effect control board 130 is obtained by the transmission process of step S8. Sent to.

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (specifically, the second start port switch 112 is “ON” following the first start port switch process of step S21. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not an “ON signal indicating that it has turned“ ”has been input (step S220).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S220: YES), the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax2 (in this embodiment, “4”) of the second special symbol determination (step S221).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S222), and the second special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S226).

  When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. When various random numbers are acquired in step 1, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

  Following the process of step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, similarly to the process of step S217 (step S227). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S227: YES), that is, when the time-saving game flag is set to “ON”, a pre-determination process is executed (step S228). This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S228 or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time-short game flag is set to “OFF”) (step S227: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the second special symbol determination. Such a hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S229). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination is put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained by the process of step S228, and the effect control board 130 is obtained by the transmission process of step S8. Sent to.

[Preliminary determination processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the prior determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the prior determination process in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S217 in FIG. 38 that it is not in the high base state, or if it is determined in step S227 in FIG. 39 that it is in the high base state, it executes jackpot determination processing (step S2181). ). Specifically, in the case of a low probability state (in the present embodiment, a normal gaming state or a short-time gaming state), a low-probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 Set to. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state (probability variation game state in this embodiment), a high probability big hit random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. Whether the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S213 in FIG. 38 (or the process of step S223 in FIG. 39) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 103. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be determined at the start of the change.

  Next, based on the determination result of step S2181, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182). Here, when it is determined that it is a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: YES), the big change pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183). In addition, when performing the predetermination process which concerns on a 1st special symbol determination in a normal game state, the table illustrated by FIG. 17 (A), (B) is set. Moreover, when performing the prior determination process which concerns on a 2nd special symbol determination in a probability change game state, the table illustrated by FIG. 18 (A) and (B) is set.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether a reach effect is performed during the change (step S2184). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2184: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185). For example, in the case of executing a preliminary determination related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state, the table illustrated in FIG. 17C is set.

  By the way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the reach effect is not performed during the change, the first special symbol is determined based on the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination at the start of the change. Variation pattern is determined. The number of first special symbol determinations may be different before and after the first special symbol determination being held is digested. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. is there. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the change, an accurate special symbol variation pattern may not be acquired prior to the first special symbol determination.

  For this reason, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2186 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 sets the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S2186). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of starting winning a prize together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is the random number value defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187). The area in which the prior determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot based on the acquired information based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). Prior to performing the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

  In addition, here, the prior determination process performed when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended has been described as an example, but the same advance is also performed when the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended. Judgment processing is performed. In addition, when the special symbol determination right is executed immediately without being suspended, the preliminary determination process is not performed.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 can execute a prior determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game before the special symbol determination is performed on the reserved right.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the jackpot game, and is set to “OFF” at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the game is a big hit game (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1”. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the holding number U2 is “1” or more (step S303: YES), the holding number U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S304).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the holding number U2 is not “1” or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the holding number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is “1” or more. Is determined (step S305). If it is determined that the hold number U1 is “1” or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S306).

  Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). When the main CPU 101 executes the shift process of step S308 following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 for the second special symbol determination. While shifting to the storage area for storage 1030, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the storage area for determination 1030. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 for the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030. While shifting, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

  Subsequent to the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 41, when the starting condition such that the main CPU 101 is not in the jackpot game and is not changing the symbol is satisfied, in this step S309, based on the jackpot random number obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  Subsequent to the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309, the special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 including information indicating whether it is related, change pattern setting information set in the process of step S310, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like (step S311).

  This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the decorative display variation display or the like on the liquid crystal display device 5 is started.

  Subsequent to the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in step S311 (step S312). At that time, in the case where the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, when the processing of step S309 to step S311 is performed, in the first special symbol display 41 The variable display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, when the processing of step S309 to step S311 is performed in a state where the acquisition information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the second special symbol display 42 displays the variation of the second special symbol. To start.

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring a variation time that is an elapsed time from the start of the variation display in step S312 (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process in step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol set in the process of step S309 (a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has variably displayed the special symbol. The special symbol stop display is continued at least until a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

  Thus, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process after the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 as the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time when the measurement is started in the process of step S313 (step S318), and performs a process during stop including a process of starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. It executes (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. The main CPU 101 executes jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is a jackpot based on whether or not it matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A). judge.

  The winning value here is a jackpot winning value defined in the high probability jackpot random number table or the low probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (the probability variation gaming state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the high probability time jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the low probability time jackpot random number table is used.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 starts such that acquisition information such as a jackpot random number acquired when a game ball is won at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 is stored in the determination storage area 1030. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

  Following the processing of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the type of jackpot is determined with reference to the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 6B and 6C) stored in the main ROM 102. Determination is made (step S3093).

  Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination in step S3091 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is The jackpot type is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 6B) for winning the first start opening. On the other hand, when it is related to the second special symbol determination, the symbol random number matches with any random number value defined in the symbol determination table for second start opening winning (see FIG. 6C). The type of jackpot is determined based on this.

  Then, the main CPU 101 sets jackpot symbol setting information corresponding to the determined jackpot type in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol is performed. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3092: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3095). Thereby, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

[Change pattern selection processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 in FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a jackpot (step S3101). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S3101: YES), the big change pattern table (see FIGS. 17 and 18) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), whether or not the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a big hit (step S3103). If it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed (step S3103: YES), the reach variation pattern table (see FIG. 17C) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). Conversely, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3103: NO), the variation pattern table for loss is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, or the process of step S3105 (step S3106). Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is set as the variation. A variation pattern is selected by reading from the pattern table.

  If the variation pattern table for losing is set in the main RAM 103, the number of reserved special symbol determination is specified based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various types of information are stored immediately before the shift process of step S308 is performed. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holdings and the presence / absence of the current time is read out from the variation pattern table for loss to select the variation pattern.

  By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

  When the main CPU 101 selects the variation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the selected variation pattern setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the effect control board 130 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process in step S309 described above.

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit as in the process of step S3092 (see FIG. 42) as illustrated in FIG. S3191). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S3191: YES), the big win game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3192).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets the time-short game flag and the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S3193). Here, the short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the short-time state in which the electric chew support function is granted, and the probability variation game flag is relatively probable to be determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination. It is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the short-time gaming flag and the probability variation gaming flag. That is, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation gaming state, both the probability variation gaming flag and the short time gaming flag are set to “ON”, and when the gaming state is controlled to the time variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming flag is “OFF”. And the short-time game flag is set to “ON”, and when the game state is controlled to the normal game state, both the probability variation game flag and the short-time game flag are set to “OFF”.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S3193, the main CPU 101 sets an opening command for notifying that the big hit game is started in the main RAM 103 (step S3194). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the jackpot 13 during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3191: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3196). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3196: YES), the short-time game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step). S3197). The short game remaining number J at this time indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is executed in the short time state (high base state).

  Following the processing of step S3197, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining count J is “0” (step S3198). Here, when it is determined that the time-saving game remaining count J is “0” (step S3198: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3199). As a result, the electric chew support function is not provided.

  The main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3199, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3196: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count J is not “0” ( Step S3198: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the probability variation game flag is set to “ON” (step S3201: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the high probability remaining game count K stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by subtracting “1”. (Step S3202). The high probability remaining game count K indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is executed in a high probability state.

  Following the processing of step S3202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game remaining count K is “0” (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that the high probability remaining game count K is “0” (step S3203: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3204). Thereby, special symbol determination comes to be performed in a low probability state.

  When the process of step S3204 is performed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not “ON” (step S3201: NO), when it is determined that the high probability game remaining count K is not “0” ( If the process of step S3203: NO) or step S3194 is performed, the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a game state setting process executed at the end of the jackpot game in the game control board 100. In the gaming machine 1, the jackpot game is executed by the big prize opening control process in step S6. When the ending in the jackpot game ends, the gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the jackpot game ends. Is executed.

  When the ending in the jackpot game ends, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the current jackpot game is a promising jackpot based on the symbol setting information stored in the main RAM 103 (step S6261). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation is not a big hit (step S6261: NO), the process proceeds to step S6266 described later.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that it is a probable big hit (step S6261: YES), it sets the probability variable game flag to “ON” (step S6262), and sets the high-probability game remaining count K to “10000”, for example (step S6262). S6263). By performing the processing in step S6263, the high probability state is substantially continued until the next jackpot.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S6263, the main CPU 101 sets the short time game flag to “ON” (step S6264), and sets the short time game remaining count J to “10000” (step S6265). By performing the series of processing from step S6262 to step S6265 in this manner, the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a probable big hit (step S6261: NO), it sets the short time game flag to “ON” (step S6266), and sets the short time game remaining number J to “50” (step S6267). .

  As a result of the series of processing in steps S6266 and S6267 in this way, the game is played in the short-time gaming state until a special symbol determination is made 50 times if a big win does not occur in the middle after the big hit game ends. Will be controlled.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed in the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 46 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

  First, when receiving a command from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes command reception processing including processing for performing processing according to the command (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S30). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the process of step S10 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). By executing this command transmission process, the image acoustic control board 140 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, sound output, etc., and the execution of the effect by lighting various lamps is performed to the lamp control board 150. Instructed.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since data relating to image acoustic control is transmitted from the image acoustic control board 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 150. Thus, the lamp control board 150 controls the effects by the effect medium such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect accessory 7, and the effect button 26 so as to synchronize with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. Is done.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 47, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11: YES), the command is controlled according to the process of step S219 (see FIG. 38) or step S229 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether or not the hold command is transmitted from the substrate 100 (step S12). If it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a hold command reception process (step S13). The hold command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S311 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). If it is determined that the received command is not a change start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S18 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a change start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a change start command reception process (step S15). This variation start command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the change start command (step S14: NO), the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not (step S18). If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol confirmation command (step S18: YES), it ends the decorative symbol variation display and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of symbol variation. A variable effect end command for instructing execution of the process is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S19).

  By transmitting this variation effect end command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 in the process of step S30, a special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed. A decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 while being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42). The stop will be displayed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol determination command (step S18: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S21). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. Includes information indicating whether the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated, information indicating which key is operated when the effect key 27 is operated, and the like. If the sub CPU 131 determines that an operation command has been received (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command in the sub RAM 133M (step S22). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, a process for realizing an effect according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, a setting based on these operations, and the like. Done.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes other processing (step S23).

[Reception command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 13 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the number of special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is incremented by “1” as illustrated in FIG. The updated value is updated (step S130). Specifically, when a hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is updated to “1” and a hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If it is, the number of suspensions of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the advance determination information is included in the received hold command (step S131), and determines that the advance determination information is not included (step S131: NO). Then, an icon display command is set (step S132).

  This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination is put on hold, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S30. This icon display command includes winning start information, and the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 determines which of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is suspended, for example. Based on the winning start information, the hold icon is displayed in the corresponding display area (the first hold icon display area 51 if the first special symbol determination is held).

  In addition, when the prior determination information is not included in the received hold command, it is not possible to perform the pre-production based on the above-described prior determination result. For this reason, when the process of step S132 is performed following the process of step S131, an icon display command that does not include prior determination information is set, and a normal icon is displayed as a hold icon accordingly. become.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the predetermination information is included in the received hold command (step S131: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the predetermination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S133).

  Next, the sub CPU 131 executes a pre-effect lottery (step S134). Specifically, first, a pre-effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133. This preliminary effect random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the preliminary effect random number, and the preliminary effect random number Whether or not to execute the pre-production is determined based on whether or not it matches any of the random numbers related to the pre-production random numbers stored in the ROM 132.

  Although not shown in the figure, the random number value related to the suspension of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub ROM 132 has the following characteristics. That is, more random numbers are associated with the combination whose determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” than the combination whose determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. Yes. In addition, more random numbers are associated with combinations of variation patterns having a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol than combinations of variation patterns having a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol. It has been. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier it is to execute the advance effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder it is to execute the preliminary effect.

  Based on the lottery result in step S134, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute a pre-effect (step S135). If the sub-CPU 131 determines to execute the pre-effect (step S135: YES), for example, an effect using a random number is used. A lottery is performed to select any one of the plurality of advance effect patterns, and the selected prior effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

  In addition, although the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-production and the lottery for selecting the pre-production effect pattern are different lotteries has been described as an example here, whether or not the pre-production is executed. In the case of execution, what kind of effect pattern the advance effect is executed may be determined by one lottery.

  When executing the process of step S136, the sub CPU 131 sets an icon display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S132). As described above, by executing the process of step S132 subsequent to the process of step S136, an icon display command including information indicating a pre-effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133. Then, by transmitting this icon display command to the image sound control board 140, a prior effect is realized.

[Variation start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is a change start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG.

  That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires a value at the time when the change start command is received from the game control board 100 with respect to the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process described above, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S150). Then, the received change start command is analyzed (step S151).

  In the variation start command, as described above, the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or relates to the second special symbol determination Information indicating the game status of the gaming machine 1, etc. are included. Therefore, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to identify the type of jackpot if the jackpot is a jackpot, a loss, or a jackpot. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for loss based on the variation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. . Similarly, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the variation pattern setting information. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

  When the change start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received change start command is a change start command related to “big hit” based on the analysis result (step S152). Here, when it is determined that the change start command is not the “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S154 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to “big hit” (step S152: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a big hit notice effect pattern setting process (step S153). The jackpot notice effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153 or determines that the received variation start command is not the variation start command related to “big hit” (step S152: NO), the sub CPU 131 displays the liquid crystal with the special symbol variation display. The variation effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern of the variation effect performed on the screen 5 is executed (step S154). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, presence / absence of reach effect, the type of decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol, the type and content of reach effect, the type of decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, etc. Is determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Sub CPU131 performs the reliability suggestion production pattern setting process which sets the production pattern of the reliability suggestion production which suggests jackpot reliability, such as a step-up production and a speech warning, following the process of step S154 (step S155). The reliability suggesting effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 starts the variation effect instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S154 and the execution of the reliability suggestion effect in the reliability suggestion effect pattern set in the process of step S155. The command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S157).

  This variation effect start command includes at least information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S154 and information indicating the reliability suggestion effect pattern set by the process of step S155. This is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process. As a result, the fluctuation effect and the reliability suggesting effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 are realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  When the setting information related to the jackpot notice is set in the sub-RAM 133 by the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process described later, a changing effect start command including this setting information is sent to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Sent. Thereby, the jackpot notice set by the sub CPU 131 is realized.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S157, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S158). Specifically, when the change start command received from the game control board 100 is a command related to the first special symbol determination, the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”. On the other hand, when the received change start command is a command related to the second special symbol determination, the number of suspensions of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

[Hitjacking notice effect pattern setting process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received variation start command is a variation start command related to “big jackpot” (step S152: YES), as shown in FIG. 50, the jackpot notice random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133. Store (step S1530). The jackpot notice random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notice and is incremented by “1” every time the above random number update process is performed. The sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when it is determined that the change start command related to the jackpot has been received as a jackpot notice random number, and stores it in the sub RAM 133.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 reads a jackpot notice type selection table corresponding to the gaming state and the variation pattern from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1531). As described above, the received variation start command includes the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or relates to the second special symbol determination. It includes winning start information indicating whether it is a thing, setting information of a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The sub CPU 131 executes the following processing based on these pieces of information included in the change start command.

  That is, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern B, the sub CPU 131 selects the first jackpot notice type from the sub ROM 132. The table (see FIG. 29A) is read and set in the sub RAM 133.

  When the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern C, the sub CPU 131 selects the second jackpot notice type from the sub ROM 132. The table (see FIG. 29B) is read and set in the sub RAM 133.

  Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), the sub CPU 131 reads The third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C) is read and set in the sub RAM 133.

  Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N), the sub CPU 131 reads The fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29D) is read and set in the sub RAM 133.

  The above is the processing when the normal mode is set, and when the jackpot notice up mode is set, any of the four selection tables for the jackpot notice up mode described above with reference to FIG. One selection table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1531, the sub CPU 131 executes a jackpot notice effect type selection process (step S1532). Whether or not to execute each jackpot notice by reading the jackpot notice type corresponding to the jackpot notice random number acquired in step S1530 from the selection table set in step S1531 in the jackpot notice effect type selection process. And determining which jackpot notice is to be executed when the jackpot notice is executed. Since the jackpot notice effect type selection processing is as described above based on FIG. 29 and the like, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, based on the processing result of step S1532, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533). Here, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533: NO), that is, when the jackpot notice type read from the set selection table is equivalent to no jackpot notice, a series of jackpot notices. The notice effect pattern setting process ends, and the process proceeds to the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot notice can be executed a plurality of times within the same variation (step S1534). Specifically, for each jackpot notice, information indicating the maximum number of times that can be executed within the same variation is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 refers to the above information regarding the jackpot notice determined to be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it can be executed a plurality of times within the same variation. If it is determined that a plurality of types of jackpot notices are to be executed, the determination process of step S1534 is performed for each of these jackpot notices.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot notice determined to be executed can be executed a plurality of times within the same variation (step S1534: YES), the sub CPU 131 selects the number of executions and the execution timing (step S1535). Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot notice that can be executed at the first execution timing and the second execution timing within the same fluctuation, the first pattern that executes the jackpot notice only at the first execution timing, and the second execution A random value is associated in advance with each of the second pattern that executes the jackpot notice only at the timing and the third pattern that executes the jackpot notice at both the first execution timing and the second execution timing. Then, a random number for selecting one of the first pattern from the first pattern is acquired, and the number of executions and execution timing of the jackpot notice are selected based on which pattern the acquired random number corresponds to . For example, when a random number corresponding to the first pattern is acquired, the number of executions is one and the first execution timing is selected. For example, when a random number corresponding to the third pattern is acquired, the number of executions is two and both the first execution timing and the second timing are selected.

  In this embodiment, a jackpot notice that can be executed three or more times within the same variation is also prepared. For this jackpot notice, the number of executions and the execution timing are selected in the same manner.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1535 or determines that the jackpot notice determined to be executed cannot be executed a plurality of times within the same variation (step S1534: NO), the jackpot notice type selection of step S1532 Information indicating the processing result is set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information for the jackpot notice effect (step S1536). If the process of step S1535 is executed prior to the process of step S1536, setting information for the jackpot preview that further includes information indicating the selection result of the number of executions and the execution timing is set.

  This jackpot notice setting information is included in the change effect start command and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S30. Thereby, the jackpot notice corresponding to the setting information of the jackpot notice is realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Variation effect pattern setting process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153 or determines that the received change start command is not a change start command related to “big hit” (step S152: NO), the sub CPU 131 finally displays a stop display on the liquid crystal screen 5. A decorative symbol to be (mainly stopped) is set (step S1540).

  Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, a special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed at the end of symbol variation, or a special symbol indicating loss If a special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, whether the special symbol is a jackpot symbol related to a probable jackpot or a jackpot symbol related to a normal jackpot Identify. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot is set. In this embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpots and 6R probability variation jackpots are prepared as probability variation jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, when the jackpot symbol X1 corresponding to the 16R probability change is stopped and displayed, the decoration symbol of “777” is set, and when the jackpot symbol X2 corresponding to the 6R probability change is stopped and displayed, “777”. Set a decorative pattern other than. In addition, when the jackpot symbol X3 corresponding to 6R normal is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol indicating the odd-numbered symbol of the odd-numbered symbol is set. The same applies to the case where the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is notified. On the other hand, when it is specified that a special symbol indicating a loss is to be stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol for notifying the loss is set. The decorative pattern for notifying this loss is a loose eye or a reach loss eye.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1540, the sub CPU 131 reads a variation effect pattern selection table for selecting a variation effect pattern of variation effects including a variation display of decorative symbols from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1541). . The sub-ROM 132 stores a variation presentation pattern selection table for jackpot and a variation presentation pattern for loss, and when a variation start command for jackpot is received, a variation presentation pattern selection table for jackpot Is read and set in the sub-RAM 133, and when the change start command related to the loss is received, the change effect pattern selection table for loss is read and set in the sub-RAM 133.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect pattern (step S1542). Specifically, the variation effect pattern selection table is prepared for each variation pattern of the special symbol. When the variation start command including the setting information indicating the variation pattern A related to the probability variation jackpot illustrated in FIG. 17 is received, the variation for the variation effect pattern A for setting the variation effect pattern A that is abrupt before the reach is established. Set the production pattern selection table. In the variation effect pattern selection table for variation effect pattern A, four types of variation effect patterns A are defined, and different effect random numbers are associated with each variation effect pattern A.

  Here, the first variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern A in which a variation effect pattern A in which a variation effect pattern is displayed in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol after the variation display of the decorative symbols in each column is started. The second variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern A in which a variation effect pattern A is produced in which the variation display of the decorative symbols in each column is started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in order. The third variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern A in which a variation effect pattern A is produced in which the variation display of the decorative symbols in each column is started in the order of the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol, and then the impact effect is performed. The fourth variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern A in which the impact display is performed after starting the variable display of the three rows of decorative symbols simultaneously.

  The sub CPU 131 reads one variation effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step S150 from the variation effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 133, and sets the information in the sub RAM 133 to set one variation. Set the production pattern.

  A plurality of variation effect patterns are also prepared for the variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns other than the variation pattern A, and one variation effect pattern is set in the same manner as the variation effect pattern A described above. .

  In addition, in the process of setting the variation effect pattern in step S1542, in which design the reach is established when the reach effect is performed, which decorative symbol is falsely stopped as a reach symbol during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach It is also decided whether to make it. According to this processing, when 7 symbol reach is established in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that although the jackpot reliability is not 100%, the probability of executing the jackpot game is relatively high. On the other hand, when 7 symbol reach is established in the probability variation gaming state, 16R probability variation becomes rich at that time, and 7 symbol reach functions as a jackpot notice.

[Reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the reliability suggesting effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S154 in FIG. 49, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not there is a jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S1550). Specifically, when the jackpot notice setting information is set in the sub-RAM 133 in accordance with the processing in step S1536 (see FIG. 50), the setting information related to the jackpot notice using the reliability suggesting effect as the setting information. Whether or not is included is determined. For example, reliability suggestion effects such as title display, character display, and cut-in may be executed as rainbow title display, rainbow color character display, and rainbow color cut-in, respectively, thereby functioning as a jackpot notice. For this reason, when the setting information of the jackpot notice includes setting information such as rainbow title display, rainbow color character display, and rainbow color cut-in, “YES” is determined in the process of step S1550.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the setting information of the rainbow color title is included in the jackpot notice setting information (step S1550: YES). Step S1551). If it is determined that the setting for rainbow title display is included (step S1551: YES), the display color for title display is set to rainbow, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1552). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting for rainbow title display is not included (step S1551: NO), the process proceeds to step S1553 described later. The display color is set to blue or red.

  As is clear from this, the title display is displayed in blue or red, and usually functions as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests the level of jackpot reliability, but by being displayed in rainbow colors It functions as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 23).

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1552 or determines that there is no setting for rainbow title display (step S1551: NO), does the setting information for the jackpot notice include the rainbow cut-in setting? It is determined whether or not (step S1553). Here, when it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is included (step S1553: YES), the display color of the cut-in is set to the rainbow color (see FIG. 26D), and the setting information is set. It is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1554). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is not included (step S1553: NO), the process proceeds to step S1555, which will be described later, but the cut-in corresponding to the operation is performed as a reliability suggesting effect. The display color is set to blue or red (see FIGS. 26B and 26C).

  As is clear from this, the cut-in is displayed in blue or red, and usually functions as a reliability suggesting effect that suggests the level of jackpot reliability, but by being displayed in rainbow colors It functions as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 26).

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1554, or determines that there is no rainbow color cut-in setting (step S1553: NO), whether the setting information of the jackpot notice includes the rainbow character display setting. It is determined whether or not (step S1555). If it is determined that the setting for rainbow character display is included (step S1555: YES), the display color for character display is set to rainbow, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1556). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting of rainbow color character display is not included (step S1555: NO), the process proceeds to step S1557. When character display is performed as a reliability suggesting effect, the display color is displayed. Is set to blue or red.

  As is clear from this, the character display is displayed in blue or red, and usually functions as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests the level of jackpot reliability, but by being displayed in rainbow colors It functions as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 25).

  The sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1556, determines that there is no jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: NO), or sets the rainbow color character display setting to the jackpot notice setting information. If it is determined that it is not included (step S1555: NO), another reliability suggestion effect production pattern is set (step S1557). Specifically, as other reliability suggestion effects, decide whether to execute various reliability suggestion effects that suggest reliability for jackpots, such as serif notices and step-up notices, and execute reliability suggestion effects In such a case, a process for determining the mode of execution is performed.

  If there are multiple performance modes with different reliability levels (expected degree of jackpot expectation and expected level of transition to probability-changing game state when jackpot expectation is a jackpot), the judgment result of the special symbol determination is a probable jackpot or normal jackpot In some cases, a production mode with high reliability is likely to be selected, and a production mode with low reliability tends to be difficult to select (may be executed in a production mode with high reliability). In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is losing, it is difficult to select a production mode with high reliability, a production mode with low reliability is easily selected, or a reliability suggesting production is not easily executed. There is a tendency (it may always be performed in a production mode with low reliability). For these reasons, for example, when a variation pattern in which SPSP reach is executed is selected, a certain reliability suggestion effect (for example, title display) is a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, a red title display: FIG. 24). When executed in (B)), it can be said that other reliability suggesting effects (for example, cut-in) are also easily executed in a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, red cut-in: FIG. 26C). In addition, for example, when a variation pattern in which only a normal reach effect is executed is selected, when a certain reliability suggestion effect is executed in a low reliability effect mode, another reliability suggestion effect is also a low reliability effect mode. It can be said that it is easy to execute. In this way, any reliability suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in a highly reliable effect mode as the variation time of the special symbol is longer, and conversely, it is performed in an effect mode that is less reliable as the variation time of the special symbol is shorter. It is easy to be done or not executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 53 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 executes an image output control process for controlling image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on a command received from the effect control board 130 (step S41). This image output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S41, the overall CPU 141 executes effect sound output control processing for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 in synchronism with or asynchronously with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 ( Step S42). When a variation effect start command including information related to the setting of one notification is sent as a jackpot notice from the effect control board 130, the special effect sound used for one notification is obtained by executing the process of step S42. It is output from the speaker 24.

  Subsequent to the process of step S42, the overall CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S44). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Accordingly, the frame lamp 25, the effect button 26, the effect accessory 7 and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect executed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. That is, for example, in the victory suggesting effect illustrated in FIGS. 11A and 15G, a process of rotating the effect actor 7 while making it emit rainbow light is performed.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S41 of FIG. First, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411). If it is determined that no command has been received (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S42.

  On the other hand, when determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S412). Next, the overall CPU 141 determines how various effect images should be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, and creates and controls a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 144. The data is stored in the RAM 143 (step S413) and the display list is set in the display list storage area (step S414).

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list storage area is provided in a VRAM having an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed. The VDP 144 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the display list set in the display list storage area. The drawing process of the displayed image is executed.

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected and when the variation pattern B is selected, the execution probabilities of the jackpot notice are different from each other. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner with a variation pattern having a higher execution probability of the jackpot notice.
Also, for example, since the jackpot notice executed when the variation pattern A is selected and the case when the variation pattern B is selected are different from each other, the jackpot notice common to these variation patterns is executed. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the appearance rate of the game is unnecessarily high, and as a result, the interest of the jackpot notice is reduced.
Further, for example, when the variation pattern B is selected, normal reach is executed, but when the variation pattern A is selected, normal reach is not executed, so that the player determines whether or not normal reach is executed. Based on the, it is possible to identify jackpot notices that may appear.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the variation pattern B is selected (in this embodiment, “premier character effect”) is not executed. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the execution probability becomes higher than necessary.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern B is selected, since the bumping effect that can be executed when the variation pattern A is selected is not performed, the execution probability of the jackpot notice becomes higher than necessary. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hit effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is executed is higher than the probability that the game is controlled in the normal game state. . For this reason, it is possible to make the player effectively expect that the variation pattern A is selected and the impact effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a common effect such as a high-speed variation of a decorative symbol is executed both when the variation pattern A is selected and when the variation pattern B is selected. For this reason, it becomes difficult to know which variation pattern has been selected and which of the bumping effect and the premier character effect is likely to be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the third time from when the jackpot notice is executed until the hit notification effect is executed, and the fourth time from when the premier character effect is executed until the hit notification effect is executed. Are different from each other. For this reason, for example, when the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it is possible to give the player the impression that the execution of the jackpot game is notified immediately after the hit effect is performed, and as a result, it is high A production effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times that the bumping effect is executed within the same variation with respect to the variation pattern A is different from the number of times that another jackpot notice is executed with respect to the other variation patterns. The notices become various, and as a result, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the hit effect having only one execution timing, a jackpot notice having a plurality of execution timings can be executed. Therefore, the jackpot notice is not executed at the first execution timing based on the fact that the jackpot notice is not executed at the first execution timing by executing the jackpot notice at the second execution timing without executing the jackpot notice at the first execution timing. It is possible to make the player who was thinking of the game feel surprise and joy, and as a result, a high production effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern C is selected, a successful take effect or a take failure effect is performed as a result effect of the contention effect. Here, since the successful take-off effect functions as a jackpot notice for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the successful take-off effect to be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect of notifying reach establishment or the reach effect is executed, another jackpot notice is easily executed without executing the hit effect (even if it is always executed in the case of a big win) Good). For this reason, after the start of reach establishment or reach production, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the appearance of another jackpot notice different from the sudden production.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the one aspect | mode of the cut-in which can take a several production | presentation aspect functions as a jackpot notice. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a rainbow cut-in will occur instead of a blue cut-in or a red cut-in as a cut-in.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the preliminary presentation is executed, the big hit announcement is easier to execute than when the preliminary presentation is not executed (in the case of the big hit, it may be executed without fail). For this reason, by executing the preliminary presentation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot notice to appear before the change starts.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the hit effect, it is suggested that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is completed, in addition to the jackpot game being executed. For this reason, compared with the case where only a jackpot game is suggested, a player's joy can be increased, and as a result, a high performance effect can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot notice different from that when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state. Therefore, compared to the case where the common jackpot notice is executed in these gaming states, the variation of the jackpot notice can be improved, and the jackpot notice itself is monotonous by executing the common jackpot notice. Can be effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot notice up mode is set, the execution probabilities of the hit effect and the successful capture effect are not changed, but the execution probabilities of other jackpot notices are increased. This makes it easier for the player to enjoy other jackpot notices. On the other hand, since the execution probabilities of the hit effect and the successful take effect do not change, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in the rare value of these jackpot notices.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the rainbow cut-in which is one of the jackpot notices is executed according to the operation by the player. For this reason, the player can be motivated to perform the operation, and the player can feel as if he / she has won the jackpot by himself / herself. A production effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a common jackpot notice (rainbow title display, rainbow color cut-in, rainbow white character display) can be executed by the variation pattern D and the variation pattern E. For this reason, as a result, the appearance rate of these jackpot notices is increased, and there is an advantage that the player can easily enjoy the jackpot notice.

[First variation on jackpot notice]
Next, a first modification of jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first mission effect.

  For example, in a first specific period from when the special symbol variation display is started until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the predetermined character reaches “4”! During the first specific period when the determination result of the special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation is “big hit” (see FIG. 55A). It is also possible to perform a mission success effect in which reach is established with 4 symbols, and to make this mission success effect function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 55C and 55D).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”, a mission failure effect representing a state in which the presented mission fails is executed without executing the mission success effect (see FIG. 55B). ). FIG. 55 (B) illustrates a state in which a predetermined character is uttering “sorry ...” without reaching reach with four symbols.

  During the presentation of the first mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decoration pattern of the first aspect may be displayed or the decoration pattern of the second aspect may be displayed.

  In this way, an effect (here, mission success effect) executed during a specific period may be executed as a jackpot notice. In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, when the first variation pattern whose variation time is the first time is selected and when the variation time is the second time longer than the first time. In a situation where a certain second variation pattern is sometimes selected, when the special symbol is variably displayed in the second variation pattern, the first mission effect illustrated in FIG. 55 and the subsequent mission are illustrated. It is conceivable to perform a successful production. In other embodiments, the first mission effect and the mission success effect may be executed when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first variation pattern.

[Second modification regarding jackpot notice]
Next, a second modification example of jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second mission effect.

  For example, in a second specific period from when the special symbol variation display is started until a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, a second state such as “Destroy the enemy with repeated hits!” In a state where reach has been established. The effect of presenting the mission is performed (see FIG. 56A). When this second mission is presented, on the liquid crystal screen 5, an effect display that informs the remaining number of enemies, a display of a button image that simulates the effect button 26, and “continuous hit!” And a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the effective period. On the other hand, if the determination result of the special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation is “big hit”, the remaining enemy will be “0” in response to repeated hits during the second specific period. Then, a mission success effect that succeeds in annihilation of the enemy may be performed, and this mission success effect may function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 56C and 56D).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”, a mission failure effect representing a state in which the presented mission fails is executed without executing the mission success effect (see FIG. 56B). ). In FIG. 56B, an effect display indicating that the second specific period of “remaining 0 seconds” has ended, and “50” enemies remain at the end of the second specific period. A state in which an effect display indicating that the effective period has expired and a gauge image indicating that the effective period has ended are displayed.

  The second mission effect and the resulting mission success effect may be performed when the special symbol is variably displayed in the second variation pattern, or the first variation pattern. It may be performed when the special symbol is variably displayed.

  In addition, during the presentation of the second mission, during the mission success presentation, and during the mission failure presentation, the decoration pattern of the first aspect may be displayed or the decoration pattern of the second aspect may be displayed. Good.

[Other variations]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following forms may be sufficient. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine has been described. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability of various jackpot notices is 100% has been described. However, if the jackpot reliability of the jackpot notice is a relatively high value, it is not necessarily required to be 100%. For example, a value other than 100% such as 99.9999% may be used.

  Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other modes may be used.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case will be described in which multiple types of reliability suggesting effects and jackpot notices are executed before reach is established. In the following description, configurations and processes common to the first embodiment are denoted by the same names, reference numerals, and step numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Mainly, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, except during the jackpot game, the performance is performed in any one of the three types of performance modes corresponding to the current gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is in the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the probability-changing gaming state, in the probability-changing mode, and when the game is controlled in the short-time gaming state, it is in the time-saving mode. Each will produce a performance. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of effect modes other than the time reduction mode, the normal mode includes the normal mode A and the normal mode B, and the probability variation mode includes the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B. .

  The production mode itself has no reliability with respect to the jackpot, each production illustrated in FIG. 7 can be executed in any of the normal mode A and the normal mode B, and either the probability variation mode A or the probability variation mode B Each effect illustrated in FIG. 8 can be executed even in the probability variation mode.

  However, in each effect mode, for example, the type of reliability suggestion effect that can be executed, the type of background image that can be displayed during the variation display of the special symbol, and the type of effect sound (for example, music) that can be output are different from each other. By providing such a difference, when the game state is the same, the special symbol variation time itself is the same, but the time required for jackpot notification (that is, the type of reliability suggestion effect) can be varied. , Different playability can be realized. Further, the player can recognize the current effect mode (that is, the current game state) based on the type of background image, for example.

  Specifically, for example, in the normal mode A, a background image representing a landscape in which clouds are floating in the blue sky is displayed, and an effect mode such as “normal mode A” except during character SP reach and SPSP reach. A character indicating the type of the character is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. In the normal mode B, a background image representing a scene where lightning falls from cloudy weather is displayed, and characters indicating the type of effect mode such as “normal mode B” are displayed on the screen except during the character SP reach and SPSP reach. Displayed in the upper left corner.

  The normal mode A and the normal mode B are switched to each other in accordance with a predetermined condition that is not accompanied by a game state transition. For example, on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination is continuously lost for a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) during one effect mode (for example, during the normal mode A), Alternatively, the display mode is switched to the other effect mode (in this case, the normal mode B) immediately before the special symbol is displayed for the predetermined number of times. In addition, on the condition that the loss has been notified in the highly reliable variation effect (for example, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern J), the other effect mode is switched at the start of the next special symbol variation.

  In the probability variation mode A, a background image representing a devastated city landscape is displayed, and in the probability variation mode B, a background image representing a building city landscape is displayed. The probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are production modes that can be transferred on condition that the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state. In the present embodiment, the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are configured as an effect mode in which the probability variation mode B and the probability variation mode B are not switched to each other. For example, the player can change the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B during the jackpot game with the transition to the probability variation gaming state. It is possible to select in which production mode the production is to be performed. Note that, for example, the next special symbol variation starts on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination is continuously lost for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during one effect mode (for example, in the probability variation mode A). Sometimes, the other production mode (in this case, probability variation mode B) may be switched.

  The time reduction mode is an effect mode in which a background image representing the landscape of the lake is displayed. In the present embodiment, only one effect mode time-saving mode is prepared corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, so that the other effect modes are not switched during the time-saving gaming state. In addition, according to the transition from the short-time game state to the normal game state, the short-time mode is immediately switched to the normal mode A or the normal mode B.

  In other embodiments, the reliability for the jackpot may be different for each effect mode (the effect mode functions as a so-called zone), and the normal mode A may be more reliable than the normal mode B. It may be good or low.

  The number of effect modes corresponding to the normal game state and the number of effect modes corresponding to the probability variation game state may be two or more (for example, four), and the number of effect modes corresponding to the short-time game state is one or more ( For example, two). Further, even if the gaming state is different, the presentation may be performed in the same presentation mode. For example, while in the normal gaming state, the performance is performed in any one of the normal mode and the probability variation mode, while in the probability variation gaming state, the performance is performed in a mode other than the normal mode (for example, the probability variation modes A and B). May be performed. Further, the performance may be performed in the time-saving mode when the game is in the probability variation gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

[Variation pattern selection table used in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment]
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used for processing for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment.

  As illustrated in FIG. 57, the second embodiment is common to the first embodiment except that the types of variation effect patterns associated with the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are different from those of the first embodiment. It is. Hereinafter, effects that are executed when the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected will be described.

  When the variation patterns B and G are selected by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes the pre-reach effect for 5 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and then performs normal reach. Run for 15 seconds. Similarly, when variation patterns C and H are selected, after performing the pre-reach effect for 10 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the normal reach is performed for 10 seconds and then the character SP reach effect is performed for 20 seconds. To do.

  When the variation patterns D and I are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the change display of the first special symbol, and then the SPSP reach effect is executed for 20 seconds. In the present embodiment, when the variation patterns D and I are selected, the SPSP reach can be executed, while the normal reach cannot be executed (the normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

  When the variation patterns E and J are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the change display of the first special symbol, then the character SP reach is executed for 20 seconds and then the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, when the variation patterns E and J are selected, the character SP reach and the SPSP reach can be executed, while the normal reach cannot be executed (the normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

  As illustrated in FIG. 57, for the variation pattern selection tables in FIGS. 57A to 57C, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation ratio of each variation pattern are the variation patterns illustrated in FIG. Since it is the same, the following can be said. That is, the longer the elapsed time from the start of the first special symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect (that is, the execution time of the pre-reach effect), the easier it is to select the jackpot and the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, when the variation effect patterns associated with the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are compared, the SPSP reach is executed as the reach effect. Rather than developing from pre-reach production to SPSP reach, developing from pre-reach production to character SP reach and then developing to SPSP reach is more reliable. For this reason, it can be said that the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol until the SPSP reach is started, the easier it is to select the jackpot and the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Note that the variation pattern that develops from the SP reach to the SPSP reach may be selected only in the case of jackpot, or may not be selected in the case of a loss (that is, the selection ratio of the variation pattern J is 0%).

<On-hold icon change effect>
Next, the “hold icon change effect” that can be executed when a prior determination result indicating that the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected in the normal mode A or the normal mode B will be described. Note that the hold icon change effect is not executed when the change pattern A or the change pattern for losing without reach is selected. The “hold icon change effect” is one of reliability suggestion effects that suggest in advance what color the hold icon will change, and is a target (hereinafter referred to as “pre-read target”) that has obtained a prior determination result. It is a production that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot. Specifically, in the hold icon change effect, for example, immediately before the hold icon related to the prefetch target changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), a hold change suggestion image having the same color as the changed color is displayed. , Display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) near the changing hold icon.

  The hold change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the hold icon after the change. The color of the reserved change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow” are prepared in advance. Since the reliability of the reserved change suggestion image for each color is the same as the reliability of the color of the special icon, description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the color of the hold icon always changes immediately after the hold icon change effect is executed. For this reason, it can be said that the hold icon change effect is an effect that changes the effect mode of the prior effect.

  The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a prior effect pattern when receiving a hold command from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball winning the first start port 11 (step S136 in FIG. 48). Subsequently, the scenario for the pending icon change effect (the color and execution timing of the pending change suggestion image) is set. The scenario for the on-hold icon change effect is determined based on, for example, a prior effect pattern. For this reason, for example, in the case of a prior effect pattern in which the color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times, a scenario for executing the hold icon change effect is set immediately before each change. Therefore, as in the case of the pre-effect, the on-hold icon change effect is more likely to be executed when the jackpot is lost than when the change pattern of the first special symbol is relatively long. It is easier to execute than when it is selected. For this reason, when displaying a reserved change suggestion image of a color with high reliability (for example, gold), a change display of a prefetch target is displayed compared to displaying a reserved change suggestion image of a color with low reliability (for example, blue). A highly reliable effect (for example, the icon change effect for changing the icon to a rainbow color, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed (may be always executed).

  By the way, the hold icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the hold icon. If such an effect is executed while the hold icon is not being displayed (for example, during SPSP reach), the color of the hold icon has changed. This may result in a rough impression as a whole, and the production effect may not be enhanced effectively.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a period during which the hold icon change effect cannot be executed in relation to other effects is determined in advance, and the scenario is not referred to during this period (or the scenario is discarded) A configuration for controlling the icon change effect so as not to be executed is adopted. In addition, while the hold icon change effect cannot be executed, the special icon that is already displayed continues to be displayed, but the new advance effect cannot be executed for the hold icon by not referring to the advance effect pattern. Control.

  For example, in the case where a fluctuating effect in which a jackpot is notified is executed, and when there is a hold that becomes a jackpot, a configuration that does not execute a hold icon change effect (and a new prior effect) is adopted (that is, an appearance rate). 0%). In addition, when the change effect which alert | reports a loss is performed, execution of the holding | maintenance icon change effect is controlled so that it may illustrate in FIG.

  FIG. 58 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the hold icon change effect can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggesting effects will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 58 (A), when the variation pattern G is selected, the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative design in the manner of losing are executed. It can be executed during production and normal reach. In other words, during the effect of stopping the decorative design in a losing manner, the reserved icon change effect (and a new prior effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 58 (B), when the variation pattern I is selected, the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach, and the effect of actually stopping the decorative design in the manner of loss are executed. Can only be performed during pre-reach production. That is, during the SPSP reach and during the production of the stop of the decorative design in a lost manner, the hold icon change production (and the new pre-production) is controlled to be unexecutable.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 58C, when the variation pattern J is selected, when the effect to stop the decoration symbol in the pre-reach effect, the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and the loss mode is executed, The hold icon change effect can be executed only during the pre-reach effect. That is, during the character SP reach, during the SPSP reach, and during the effect of stopping the decorative design in a lost manner, the on-hold icon change effect (and the new prior effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the fluctuation | variation pattern H, when the production | presentation which stops a decoration symbol in a pre-reach production, a normal reach, a character SP reach, and a dismissal aspect is performed by the fluctuation pattern H being selected, it is suspended. Icon change production can be executed during production before reach and during normal reach. In other words, during the character SP reach and during the effect of stopping the decoration symbol in a losing manner, the hold icon change effect (and the new prior effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

  Further, although the illustration of the variation pattern for losing without reach is also omitted, when such a variation pattern is selected, when the pre-reach effect and the effect of actually stopping the decorative design in the losing manner are executed, the hold icon The change effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect. In other words, during the effect of stopping the decorative design in a losing manner, the reserved icon change effect (and a new prior effect) is controlled to be unexecutable.

  As illustrated in FIG. 58, the on-hold icon change effect (and the new advance effect) in the present embodiment can be executed before the start of the character SP reach and before the start of the SPSP reach during the change display of the first special symbol. It is not executed after the start of these reach productions (ie, the appearance rate is 0%). In other words, the hold icon change effect (and the new advance effect) can be executed while displaying the decorative pattern of the first aspect, but cannot be executed while the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is not executed in the change effect in which the jackpot is notified. For this reason, for example, when the hold icon change effect is executed during the normal reach and the normal reach is developed to the SP reach, the hold icon change effect is executed to notify that the change is being performed. There is a risk that it can be predicted. However, since the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit for the special icon that has been changed by the execution of the hold icon change effect, it is possible to give the player motivation to continue the game. In another embodiment, the hold icon change effect (and the new prior effect) is executed in the change effect that is notified of the jackpot (that is, during the effect that is executed when the change patterns A to E are selected). Alternatively, it may be executed during the stop display of the first special symbol.

  Moreover, the fluctuation pattern which can perform a pending | holding icon change production (and new prior production) and the variation pattern which cannot be performed may be preset. For example, the hold icon change effect (and the new prior effect) can be executed when the variation pattern G is selected, may not be executed when the variation patterns H to I are selected, and is a big hit. Regardless of this, it may be impossible to execute when a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach) is executed is selected.

  In another embodiment, the hold icon change effect (and the new advance effect) may be controlled so as not to be executable during the normal reach, may be executed during the character SP reach, or during the SPSP reach. May be executed. In addition, the appearance rate of the hold icon change effect (and the new prior effect) may be lower as the reliability of the jackpot is higher. For example, the appearance rate may be the relationship before the reach> = normal reach> character SPSP reach> SPSP reach> 0%, or before reach = normal reach = character SPSP reach> SPSP reach> 0 % Relationship is also acceptable.

  Note that the hold icon change effect may be executed also in the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B (that is, the probability change game state). For example, while the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed, the hold icon change effect (and the advance effect) is controlled to be executable during the no reach effect and before the start of the reach reach (ie, before the reach effect), while after the start of the battle reach May be controlled to be infeasible. For example, when the hold icon change effect is executed in the probability change mode rather than the normal mode, the jackpot expectation degree and the expectation degree to shift to the probability change game state when the jackpot is high may be low. It may be the same or the same.

  Note that the hold icon change effect is, for example, a predetermined reliability indication in a predetermined situation (for example, in the normal mode A, in the probability variation mode, in the variation display of the prefetch target or the variation display before the prefetch target). In the effect (for example, when a background effect or a pattern change effect described later) is executed, it may be executed only in the case of a big hit, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in not only the hold icon change effect but also other effects (including the effect mode itself).

  In other embodiments, the reserved icon change effect and the prior effect may be configured as one effect. In addition, there may be a case where the pre-effect is executed after the hold icon change effect and a case where the pre-effect is not executed (so-called “gase”). May be.

<The icon change effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, “the icon change effect” that can be executed when the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected in the normal mode A or the normal mode B will be described. The icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for losing without reach is selected.

  The “icon change effect” is one of the reliability suggesting effects that suggest in advance what color the icon will change, and is an effect that suggests the reliability for the jackpot of the changing effect being executed. In the present embodiment, in response to the execution of “the icon change effect”, the color of the icon always changes immediately after that (ie, the effect mode of the pre-effect changes). Specifically, in the icon change effect, for example, immediately before the icon changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), the icon change suggestion image having the same color as the changed color is changed. A predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is displayed near the icon.

  The icon change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the icon after change, and is an image in the same mode as the image used as the hold change suggestion image. The color of the icon change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow” are prepared in advance. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the icon change suggestion image and the color of each icon is 3% for “blue”, 16% for “green”, 45% for “red”, and “gold”. Is 65% and “rainbow” is 100%. When displaying an icon change suggestion image of a color with high reliability (for example, gold), compared to a case of displaying an icon change suggestion image of a color with low reliability (for example, blue), for example, an effect with high reliability (for example, Night background, SPSP reach) is easy to be executed (may be executed).

  The icon change effect is an effect that changes the effect mode of the pre-effect as in the hold icon change effect. However, the icon change effect is not an on-hold icon but an effect that changes the icon, and a point that is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination instead of the prior determination information. It is different from change production.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect at the start of the change effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the information on whether or not the jackpot is achieved. Determined by lottery.

  The icon change effect execution lottery table is a table in which, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not the icon change effect is executed is determined in advance. In the case of a big hit, among the determination values of “0 to 99”, the determination value of “0 to 39” is assigned to the determination result that “execute” the icon change effect (the execution ratio is 40%). ), A determination value of “40 to 99” is assigned to the determination result that the icon change effect is “not executed” (ratio of not executing 60%). On the other hand, in the case of losing, the determination value of “0 to 29” is assigned to the determination result of “execute” among the determination values of “0 to 99” (the execution ratio is 30%). A determination value of “30 to 99” is assigned to the determination result “not executed” (the ratio of not executing 70%).

  Thus, since the icon change effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of losing, the game is more reliable when the icon change effect is executed than when the icon change effect is not executed. Can recognize.

  The icon change effect is executed, for example, under a predetermined condition (for example, in the normal mode A or in the probability change mode, a predetermined reliability suggesting effect (for example, a background effect or a pattern change effect described later) is executed. In the case of a big hit, it may be executed only in the case of a jackpot, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in not only the icon change effect but also other effects (including the effect mode itself).

  In addition, when the hold icon (the effect mode of the pre-effect) is “rainbow” in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect, the effect mode of the pre-effect cannot be changed any more. Execution is impossible (see FIG. 59). For this reason, the icon change effect is a reliability suggestion effect that may be executed when the hold icon is not a rainbow.

  When it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 131 refers to, for example, the icon display mode determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines whether or not the big hit and the variation pattern. The change pattern of the icon is determined by random lottery based on the type.

  The icon display mode determination table includes, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining a change pattern of the icon, and a color of the hold icon immediately before being displayed as the icon (hereinafter, “final color at the time of hold”) And a change pattern of the color of the icon until the icon is deleted.

  Here, the change pattern of the icon will be described. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the icon at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the icon at the time of a loss. 59 and 60, the “first change color” is a color that changes first after the hold icon is displayed as the icon, and the “final color at that time” is the color immediately before the icon is deleted. Color. “No change” indicates that the icon change effect is not executed (that is, the color of the icon does not change or cannot change any more). In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the “ratio” column indicates how many determination values are assigned among the determination values “0 to 99” that are compared with random numbers for determining the change pattern of the icon. Is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the change pattern of the icon includes a pattern that directly changes from the first change color to the final color at that time (the number of executions of the icon change effect is twice), and the first change color is the final color at that time. And a pattern that changes to the final color at that time through a change from the first change color to another color (the icon change effect is executed three times or more). There is.

  As illustrated in FIG. 59, when the big hit and the variation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of holding is “white”, the final color at that time is “blue”, “green”, “red” ”,“ Gold ”, or“ rainbow ”are 2%, 5%, 39%, 53%, and 1%, respectively. Therefore, among the determination values “0 to 99”, the determination value “0, 1” is assigned to the determination result that the final color is “blue”, and the determination result “green” is determined. A determination value of “2 to 6” is assigned to the determination result, a determination value of “7 to 45” is assigned to the determination result of “red”, and a determination result of “gold” is assigned to The determination value “46 to 98” is assigned, and “99” is assigned as the determination value to the determination result “rainbow”.

  In addition, when the big pattern and the variation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color at the time of holding is “blue” or “green”, the final color at that time is “red”, “gold”, or “rainbow” The percentages are 40%, 58% and 2%, respectively. For this reason, among the determination values “0 to 99”, the determination value “0 to 39” is assigned to the determination result that the final color at that time is “red”, and the determination result “gold” is determined. A determination value of “40 to 97” is assigned to “90”, and “98, 99” is assigned as a determination value to the determination result of “rainbow”.

  As illustrated in FIG. 60, in the case of a loss, the ratio of each change pattern depending on whether the number of first special symbol determination hold at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is 0 to 3 Is different. Specifically, for example, when the change pattern G to J is selected and the final color at the time of holding is “white”, the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is 0. When and when it is 1.

  In this case, if the number of the first special symbol determination is 0, the ratio of the final color of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, or “rainbow” at that time is 60%, respectively. 27%, 10%, 3%, 0%. For this reason, among the determination values “0 to 99”, the determination value “0 to 59” is assigned to the determination result that the final color at that time is “blue”, and the determination result “green” is determined. The determination value of “60 to 86” is assigned to the determination result, the determination value of “87 to 96” is assigned to the determination result of “red”, and the determination result of “gold” is assigned to The determination value of “97 to 99” is assigned, and the determination value is not assigned to the determination result of “rainbow” (the appearance rate of rainbow is 0% when lost).

  In addition, if the number of the first special symbol determination is 1, the ratio of the final color “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, or “rainbow” at that time is 65%, 26%, 7%, 2% and 0%. For this reason, among the determination values “0 to 99”, the determination value “0 to 64” is assigned to the determination result that the final color is “blue”, and the determination result “green” is determined. Is assigned a judgment value of “65 to 90”, a judgment value of “91 to 97” is assigned to a judgment result of “red”, and a judgment value of “gold” is assigned to The determination value of “98, 99” is assigned, and the determination value is not assigned to the determination result of “rainbow” (rainbow appearance rate is 0% when lost).

  As illustrated in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, in this embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the easier the final color at that time becomes a color with higher reliability. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the final color at the time of holding is white, and after the icon change effect is executed after that, the color of the icon (the effect mode of the pre-effect) becomes blue. Is 21% (= 0.4 × 0.53 × 100). In addition, when the color of the hold icon (the effect mode of the pre-effect) becomes blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect at the big hit, the icon change effect is executed in response to the execution of the icon change effect thereafter. The probability that the icon is gold is 23% (= 0.4 × 0.58 × 100).

  In addition, the probability of becoming gold after the color of the icon turns blue in response to the execution of the icon change effect after that is the white color at the time of holding is 0.9% (= 0) .3 × 0.03 × 100). Also, if the color of the hold icon turns blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect at the time of losing, the probability that the icon will be gold in response to the execution of the icon change effect after that is 3.9% (= 0.3 × 0.13 × 100).

  In addition, the probability for each final color at the time when the final color at that time becomes a rainbow according to the execution of the icon change effect is higher in the order of white <blue (or green) <red <gold. As a result, it is possible to expect the icon to become a rainbow as the color of the hold icon increases.

  Thereby, the icon is more likely to have a higher reliability as the hold icon has a higher reliability. Even if the color of the hold icon is the same, the big hit is more likely to be a color with higher reliability than the loss. Thereby, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot from when the hold icon is displayed in a highly reliable manner. When the hold icon is equal to or greater than the first predetermined mode (for example, green), the icon corresponding to the hold icon may always be in the second predetermined mode (for example, rainbow color or gold).

  As illustrated in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, in the case of a loss, the smaller the number of reservations, the easier the final color at that time becomes a highly reliable color. In addition, when it is a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 0), the final color at that time may always be a predetermined color (for example, blue).

  In other embodiments, the higher the reliability of the hold-in final color, the less likely the final color at that time will be a more reliable color (the final color at that time must be greater than or equal to the hold-up final color). Does not have to be). In addition, as the reliability of the final color at the time of holding is lower, the final color at that time may be likely to be a color with higher reliability (for example, when the final color at the time of holding is a predetermined color (for example, blue), The final color may be iridescent). In the case of big hits, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the easier the final color at that time becomes more reliable. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the higher the reliability of the final color at holding, the higher the final color at that time. May not be a reliable color.

  In another embodiment, the change in the icon change effect is a variation pattern in which an effect with high reliability (for example, SPSP reach) can be executed and a change pattern in which only an effect with low reliability (for example, normal reach) is executed. The pattern may be determined at different rates. For example, the variation pattern E may be more likely to be a highly reliable color at that time than the variation pattern B (a predetermined color with a high degree of reliability corresponding to the variation pattern E). May be good). In addition, the variation pattern J may be more likely to be a highly reliable color than the variation pattern G (even if the predetermined color is always highly reliable corresponding to the variation pattern J). Good.) In addition, as the variation pattern has a longer variation time of the first special symbol, the final color at that time may be more likely to be a reliable color, or may be less likely to be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a period during which the icon change effect can be executed and a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed will be described. FIG. 61 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the icon change effect can be executed and a period in which the icon change effect cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggesting effects will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the icon is displayed until immediately before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed is adopted. For this reason, by changing the icon at various timings during the variation display of the first special symbol, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot being notified by the variation variation being executed. However, by causing the icon to be noticed by the execution of the icon change effect, the player's consciousness may be deviated from other effects being executed, and the interest may not be enhanced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed in relation to other effects is determined in advance, and the icon change effect is controlled to be executable during this period. . In addition, in this embodiment, if the said icon change effect is not performed, the structure which does not change the color of the said icon (namely, the effect aspect of the prior effect which concerns on the said icon) is also employ | adopted. For this reason, during the period when the icon change effect cannot be executed, the effect mode of the prior effect related to the icon does not change.

  As illustrated in FIG. 61A, when the variation pattern A is selected, the icon change effect cannot be executed from the start of variation of the first special symbol to the stop display.

  As illustrated in FIG. 61 (B), when the variation pattern B or G is selected and the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the effect of permanently stopping the decorative design are executed, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. It can only be executed during. In other words, the icon change effect is controlled to be unexecutable during the normal reach and during the effect of stopping the decorative design. In the variation patterns B and G, since the winning is notified immediately after the start of normal reach (for example, after 10 seconds), there is a possibility that an impression is not generated if the icon changes during normal reach. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns B and G are selected, by adopting a configuration in which the icon change does not change during normal reach, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from giving an impression that does not change. Yes.

  As illustrated in FIG. 61 (C), when the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach, and the effect to stop the decoration symbol are executed by selecting the variation pattern D or I, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. It can be executed during production and during a part of the period during SPSP reach. Specifically, during the SPSP reach, it is impossible to execute during the title display and during the effect after the operation promotion effect, and can be executed during the battle effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 24C and 24D, the title display itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect, and thus the icon change effect having the same function is not executed during the title display. It is configured as follows. In other embodiments, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable during the title display. In such a configuration, even if a blue title display having a relatively low reliability with respect to the jackpot is displayed, the icon changes color during the title display due to the icon change effect (for example, gold or rainbow). Color). Thereby, the player can continue the game without losing the expectation for the subsequent development.

  As illustrated in FIG. 26, the operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26, and the player's consciousness with respect to the button image, the gauge image, and the effect button 26 (and the up key and the down key). This is a directing effect. If the icon changes during such a performance, the player may be surprised and cannot perform an appropriate operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the icon change does not change during the operation promotion effect, the player can concentrate on the operation promotion effect and perform an appropriate operation.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 26B to 26D, the cut-in itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during cut-in for the same reason as during title display.

  After the cut-in, in the case of a big hit, after the effect that the false notification effect and the decorative pattern of the second aspect are falsely stopped with the same pattern is executed, after the decorative pattern of the first aspect is falsely stopped with the same pattern The big hit is notified by this stop. Also, in the case of a loss, after the decorative symbol of the second aspect is falsely stopped at the reach-losing eye, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is falsely stopped at the reach-losing eye, and then the real-time stop is notified. Even if the icon changes during the presentation of such a winning notification, there is a possibility that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced effectively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect is not executed after cut-in.

  As illustrated in FIG. 61 (D), when the variation pattern E or J is selected, the effect of the icon before the reach, the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and the effect that stops the decorative design are executed. The production can be executed during the pre-reach production and during a period during the character SP reach and the SPSP reach. Specifically, during the character SP reach, it is impossible to execute during the title display and the capture failure production (and during the development suggestion production), and during the contention production. Note that, during SPSP reach, control is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the title display relating to the character SP reach itself functions as a reliability suggesting effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the title display related to the character SP reach for the same reason as the title display related to the SPSP reach.

  While it may be lost during the capture failure production, the player may watch the progress of the production with a sense of expectation that the development suggestion production may be executed. If the icon changes during such a performance (for example, changes to a rainbow color that notifies that it is a big hit), there is a possibility that the sense of crisis that it may be lost may not be effectively enhanced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the capture failure effect.

  In addition, during the development suggestion effect executed when the character SP reach is changed to the SPSP reach, the player may increase the expectation for the SPSP reach while rejoicing that the change effect continues. If the icon changes during such an effect, the feeling of expectation increases too much, and there is a risk of disappointment if a blue title display is displayed at the start of SPSP reach. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change does not change during the development suggestion effect.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the variation patterns C and H, when the variation pattern C or H is selected, the production | generation which carries out the main stop of the pre-reach production, the normal reach, the character SP reach, and the decorative design is executed. The icon change effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect, during the normal reach, and during the contention effect in the character SP reach. On the other hand, the icon change effect is controlled to be unexecutable while the title is being displayed in the character SP reach, during the capture failure effect, during the capture success effect, and during the effect of permanently stopping the decorative symbol.

  Although the illustration of the variation pattern for losing without reach is also omitted, if the variation pattern for losing without reach is selected, if the icon change effect is executed, the player will be uncomfortable, There is a risk that the production effect will be reduced. Therefore, when the variation pattern for losing without reach is selected, the icon change effect is controlled so as not to be executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a short variation pattern (for example, variation pattern for reachless loss and variation pattern A that is 13.5 seconds or less) is selected, the icon change effect is not executed, and the relative variation is not performed. When the long variation patterns B to E or G to J are selected, the icon change effect can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect (and the pre-effect related to the icon) can be executed during display of either the decorative pattern of the first aspect or the decorative pattern of the second aspect.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or the normal reach is more effective than the case where the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or SPSP reach. The jackpot is configured so that the jackpot is easily notified. In other words, when the icon change effect is executed during the display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect, it is easier to notify the jackpot than when it is executed during the display of the decorative pattern of the second aspect (always) May be a big hit). Note that the jackpot may be more easily notified when the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or the SPSP reach than when the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or the normal reach. The jackpot expectation may not be different.

  In the case where a resurrection effect is executed in which the three decorative symbols of the same pattern are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be lost at the end of the SPSP reach, the icon may be executed. For example, after the effect of pretending to be lost by falsely stopping the decorative pattern of the first aspect at the reach-losing eye, before the start of the resurgence effect (or reviving effect) of falsely stopping the decorative pattern of the first aspect in a pattern-matched form At the time of start), the icon color may be changed to a rainbow color according to the execution of the icon change effect. During the icon change effect, the decorative pattern of the first aspect may be displayed, or the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed.

  Further, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable after the operation promotion effect in the SPSP reach. In such a configuration, for example, it is configured such that a person who executes the icon change effect after the operation promotion effect is more likely to be notified of the jackpot than a case where the icon change effect is not executed after the operation promotion effect. (It may be a big hit), and the expectation level of the big hit need not be different.

  In addition, if the development suggestion effect is executed subsequent to the take-failure effect, the icon change effect can be executed during the take-failure effect, and if the non-development suggestion effect is executed following the take-failure effect, the take-off failure is possible. The icon change effect may be controlled to be unexecutable during the effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the icon change effect is executed during the take failure effect and that the SPSP reach is developed and the jackpot expectation is high.

  Further, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable during the development suggestion effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the jackpot due to the synergistic effect of the development suggestion effect and the icon change effect.

  The icon change effect may also be executed in the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B (that is, the probability change game state). For example, while changing the display of the second special symbol, the icon change effect (and the pre-effect related to the icon) is controlled to be executable during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach effect), It may be controlled to be impossible after execution of battle reach (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). Or you may control so that the relationship of the appearance rate of the said icon change production | presentation may become the relationship of a non-reach production and before battle reach start (namely, production before reach)> after battle reach start> 0%. For example, when the icon change effect is executed in the probability change mode rather than the normal mode, the jackpot expectation degree and the expectation degree to shift to the probability change gaming state when the jackpot is high may be low. It may be the same or the same.

<Pseudo-continuous production>
Next, referring to FIGS. 62 to 63, in normal mode A or normal mode B, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or a variation pattern for losing without reach having a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected. A “pseudo-continuous effect” that can be executed in the case of a case will be described. Note that when the variation pattern for losing without reach or the variation pattern A that is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of a series of effects in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect and the reliability. In FIG. 62, for convenience of description, the notation of characters indicating the type of effect mode is omitted.

  The pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 62) is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and is variably displayed so as to scroll all the decorative symbols of the first aspect that are pseudo-stopped again at high speed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “restart”). For example, when the decorative symbol is restarted once by the pseudo-continuous effect, it appears that the decorative symbol is variably displayed twice while the special symbol is displayed once. For example, if the “pseudo-continuous symbols” (FIGS. 62A, 62C, and B) as the middle symbols on the active line are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), all of them are simulated by pseudo-continuous effects. Are restarted (see, for example, FIGS. 16A, 16C, and 16D). The pseudo-continuous symbol is a special symbol (decorative symbol that is not used during normal variation display) that suggests execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

  The quasi-continuous effect is an effect that can be executed 0 to 3 times, and suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot depending on how many times it is executed. The big hit is more likely to be executed than the loser, and can be executed three times only in the case of the big win. Further, if the variation time of the first special symbol is long, the number of executions tends to be large (for example, twice), and if the variation time is short, the number of executions is likely to be small (for example, 0 times or once). The number of executions may be one or more in the case of a big hit, and may be zero in the case of a loss.

  There are two types of pseudo-continuous effects: “normal pseudo-continuous effects” and “story pseudo-continuous effects”, and any one of them during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect (that is, during the display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect). Can be executed. The “normal pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that does not involve changing the background image, and the “story pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that involves changing the background image.

  In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern determined when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the type of pseudo-continuous production and the number of executions thereof are determined to be any one of 0 to 3 times. . Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for losing without reach having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds or the fluctuation patterns B, C, G, H are selected, the fluctuation pattern D, I can be executed 0 times or once. , J can be executed 0 to 2 times (may be executed twice). When the variation pattern E is selected, it can be executed 0 to 3 times (may be executed twice or more). The number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect may be uniquely determined based on the variation pattern.

  Since the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect, the reach may be established after execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, or the reach may not be established. It should be noted that when the variation patterns B to E and G to J are selected, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, and the reach is always established after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 62A, when the “normal pseudo-continuous effect” is performed once, for example, the following effects are performed. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, the pseudo first-sequence variable display for scrolling the decorative pattern of the first mode at a high speed for a time shorter than the change time of the special symbol is started. (See FIGS. 62A and 62A).

  Then, for example, at the end of the first pseudo display, the left design and the right design (both in the first mode) are simulated and stopped in the center of the screen, and then the middle design A symbol (for example, a special symbol representing a kanji “ream”) is pseudo-stopped on the active line (see FIGS. 62A, 62B, and 62C). When the pseudo continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the first pseudo continuous effect is performed, whereby the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are restarted. As a result, the pseudo second-variable display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62A and 62D).

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is restarted, the effect agent 7 is operated with an operation pattern that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect toward the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIGS. 62A and 62D). Along with this, an effect image for informing the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect object 7.

  When the operation of the director is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (e), a character indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 2” (a character indicating that it is a pseudo second continuous) is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Appears in the corner. In addition, a pseudo continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, green indicating pseudo second continuous) indicating the number of pseudo continuous stations is displayed along the inner edge of the screen. The decorative design during restart is the decorative design of the first aspect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 62B, when the “story pseudo-continuous effect” is performed once, for example, the following effects are performed. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, the pseudo first-sequence variable display for scrolling the decorative pattern of the first mode at a high speed for a time shorter than the change time of the special symbol is started. (See FIGS. 62B and 62A).

  In the present embodiment, the stage actor 7 is moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 with an operation pattern that suggests that the story pseudo-series effect may be executed as the pseudo first-line variable display is started. It is operated in the direction (see FIGS. 62B and 62A). Accordingly, an effect image similar to the effect image notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect actor 7.

  When the operation of the director character 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62B and 62B, a story image representing the past of the teammate character is displayed on the entire screen. Along with this, a production sound related to the contents of this image (for example, a narration introducing the past of the ally character) is output from the speaker 24. Thereby, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that the story pseudo-continuous production may be executed while knowing the history of the friend character.

  Then, for example, at the end of the pseudo display of the first variable, the left design and the right design (both of the first design) are different in the center of the screen while the story image is displayed on the entire screen. After being stopped, a pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a special symbol representing the katakana “su”) is pseudo-stopped on the active line as a middle symbol (see FIGS. 62B and 62C). In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous symbol related to the story pseudo-continuous effect is not used when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player which pseudo-continuous effect is executed depending on the type of pseudo-continuous pattern. Note that the same pseudo-continuous pattern may be used for the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect.

  When a pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), the first symbol pseudo-continuous effect is performed, whereby the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are restarted. As a result, the pseudo second-variable display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62A and 62D).

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is restarted by executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, the effect agent 7 is operated in the same operation pattern as when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. (See FIGS. 62B and 62D). Accordingly, an effect image similar to the effect image notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect actor 7.

  When the operation of the director character 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62B and 62E, the story image related to the pseudo second series, which is a continuation of the story image related to the first pseudo series, is displayed on the entire screen. Is done. Along with this, a production sound related to the contents of this image (for example, a narration introducing the past of the ally character) is output from the speaker 24. The decorative design during restart is the decorative design of the first aspect. Unlike the case where the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed twice. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice, the second pseudo continuous effect is performed after the first pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the second pseudo continuous effect is performed except that the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the pseudo second variable display instead of during the pseudo first variable display, refer to FIG. The production is almost the same as the production described above. Although a detailed description is omitted, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol (both of the decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pseudo second variable display, the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is simulated as a middle symbol. It is stopped (see FIG. 63 (c)). When the pseudo continuous symbol as a middle symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), all the decorative symbols are restarted by performing the second pseudo continuous effect. As a result, the pseudo third continuous change display is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a character indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 3” is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen during the pseudo-third continuous variation display, or is the pseudo third continuous. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, red) indicating that is displayed along the inner periphery of the screen edge (see, for example, FIG. 72F). If reach is established during the quasi-third continuous variation display, for example, all images related to the pseudo-continuous effect are deleted, and the reach effect is developed, and SPSP reach is always executed (see FIG. 63 (d)). .

  In this embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed three times. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, the third pseudo continuous effect is performed after the second pseudo continuous effect is performed. This third pseudo-rendition production functions as a jackpot notice that provides a definite notice of a big hit. When the third pseudo continuous effect is performed, except that the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the pseudo third continuous variable display instead of the pseudo first continuous variable display, refer to FIG. The production is almost the same as the production described above. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the third pseudo-continuous effect is performed, after the left symbol and the right symbol (both the decorative symbols of the first mode) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pseudo-third variation display. As a middle symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 63 (e)). When the pseudo continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds), all the decorative symbols are restarted by performing the third pseudo continuous effect. Thereby, the pseudo display of the fourth variation is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a character indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 4” is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen during the pseudo-fourth-variable display, or the pseudo-fourth series. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) indicating this may be displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen (not shown). Further, the frame lamp 37 emits a rainbow color while these images are displayed. When reach is established during the pseudo fourth continuous change display, for example, all images related to the pseudo continuous effect are deleted, and the reach effect is developed, and the jackpot is always notified at the end of the SPSP reach (FIG. 63 ( f)).

  In the present embodiment, the reliability for each number of times that the pseudo-continuous effects are performed is determined in advance so as to increase in the order of 0 times <1 time <2 times <3 times. When the variation pattern B to E, G to J, or the variation pattern for unreachable loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed a small number of times (for example, once). Therefore, when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is small (for example, 0 times or 1 time), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach can be executed, and the decorative design is in the first mode following the pre-reach effect. There are cases where it becomes the second mode.

  Further, when the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, a large number of times (for example, two times) of pseudo-continuous effects can be executed, and when the variation patterns D and E are selected, the number of times is larger. It is possible to execute (for example, three times) pseudo-continuous effects. For this reason, when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is large (for example, twice), SPSP reach can be executed, and the decorative design tends to be the second mode following the pre-reach effect. Note that the SPSP reach may be executed whenever the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effects is two or more.

  It should be noted that “full rotation reach effect” in which the decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while the design symbols are aligned may be executed only when the reach is established after the pseudo-continuous effects are performed three times. For example, when the combination of “111” is displayed, the combination of “222” is displayed next, and the same left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are synchronized. It is a reach effect that slowly scrolls in a pattern-aligned manner. The full rotation reach effect is a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a big hit, and is not executed in the case of a loss (reliability 100%). For this reason, the full rotation reach effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that gives a definite notice that the jackpot game will be executed. For example, when the variation pattern E is selected, it develops to full rotation reach with a small probability (for example, 1%) through (or without) normal reach, and SPSP with the remaining probability (in this case 99%) You may develop to reach.

  Note that the full rotation reach may be executed using only the decorative design of the first aspect, may be executed using only the decorative design of the second aspect, or the decorative design and the second of the first aspect. You may perform using the decoration pattern of an aspect. For example, in the full rotation reach, the decoration pattern of the first aspect may be displayed at the start, the decoration pattern of the second aspect may be displayed in the middle, and the decoration pattern of the first aspect may be displayed in the final stage. Further, for example, in the full rotation reach, the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed at the start, and the decorative pattern of the first aspect may be displayed halfway.

  It should be noted that the normal pseudo-continuous production is a pseudo-continuous production that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility of being a “big hit” in the running variation display, and the story pseudo-continuous production is “ It may be a pseudo-continuous production that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of “ In other words, it is easier for the big hit to be executed than the loser, and it is easier to execute the story pseudo-continuous effect. For example, when a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss, and when a story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a big hit. Further, for example, when a story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) may be more easily executed after the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. May be).

  In addition, the possibility of becoming a “big hit” in the variable display during execution may be higher in the normal pseudo-continuous effect than in the story pseudo-continuous effect. In other words, the jackpot is more likely to execute the normal pseudo-continuous effect than the loss, and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be less likely to be executed. For example, when a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be a big hit, and when a story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be lost or a big win. In addition, for example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) may be easily executed after the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed (which is always executed). May be).

  In addition, the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed in a plurality of effect modes may have different effects depending on the effect modes, and the expectation level for the jackpot and the expectation level for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state in the case of the jackpot is different. There may be no directing. For example, in the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect, the above two expectations are higher when the normal mode A is executed than when the normal mode B is executed. Even in the mode, the above two expectations may not change.

<Background production>
Next, referring to FIG. 64, in normal mode A, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all variation patterns for losing without reach (for example, variation times are 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5). The “background effect” that can be executed when any one of the seconds) is selected will be described. The background effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of a series of effects when a background effect is executed.

  The background effect (see FIGS. 64D and 64E) is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and is prepared in advance from the state in which the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed. This is an effect of shifting to a state in which a plurality of types of background images (two types in the present embodiment) are displayed. There are two types of background images after transition that are displayed by the background effect: a bird background in which birds are displayed and a night background in which the moon and stars are displayed. The bird background is a background effect in a mode that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility of being a “big hit” in the running variation display. The night background is a background effect in a mode that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of being a “big hit” in the fluctuation display during execution, and a highly reliable effect (for example, compared to when the bird background is executed (for example, (SPSP reach) is an effect that is easy to be executed later (may be executed). The night background is more likely to be a big hit than the bird background, and the respective reliability is 10% and 25%. Both are images with a wide display area for the entire screen (specifically, images displayed on the entire screen).

  The background effect is one of the reliability suggesting effects executed during the effect without reach or during the effect before reach (that is, when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is scrolled at a low speed or at a high speed). The background effect is executed at one of the timing of the start of the variable effect, the restart of the pseudo second series related to the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the restart start of the pseudo third series. . The degree of expectation for jackpot and the degree of expectation for shifting to the probability-changing gaming state when it is a jackpot may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the background effect. For example, the two expectations may be set higher (or lower) as the time from the start of the change effect to the execution of the background effect is longer. Further, for example, the above two expectations may be higher when executed at the start of restart of the pseudo third series than when executed at other timings. It should be noted that when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the night background may be easier to execute than when it is not executed (the night background may always be used).

  During the execution of the background effect, the background image related to the background effect is colored by displaying the decorative pattern of the first aspect with high decorativeness instead of the decorative pattern of the second aspect with low decorativeness. It is possible to make a gorgeous impression.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the background effect when starting the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52). The display timing and which of the night background is to be displayed is determined by random number lottery.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a background effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines whether or not to execute the background effect by random lottery based on information on whether or not the jackpot is won. . The background effect execution lottery table is a table in which, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not the background effect is executed is determined in advance. In the case of a big hit, among the determination values of “0 to 99”, the determination value of “0 to 39” is assigned to the determination result that “execute” the background effect (the execution ratio is 40%). A determination value of “40 to 99” is assigned to the determination result that the background effect is “not executed” (ratio of not executing 60%). On the other hand, in the case of losing, the determination value of “0 to 29” is assigned to the determination result of “execute” among the determination values of “0 to 99” (the execution ratio is 30%). A determination value of “30 to 99” is assigned to the determination result “not executed” (the ratio of not executing 70%).

  Thus, the player recognizes that the reliability is higher when the background effect is executed than the case where the background effect is executed because the background effect is easier to execute than when the game is lost. It is possible. Note that the background effect is executed if it is a big hit and may not be executed if it is a loss.

  FIG. 64A shows the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A. A state in which the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the determination result is a loss is displayed as an example. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is displayed. The special symbol determination is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, in the normal mode A, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIG. 64C). In this example, it is determined in advance that the background effect is executed when the variable effect starts.

  When the decorative symbol variation display is started, first, the decorative symbol that has been stopped (decoration symbol of the first aspect) moves slightly upward while slightly moving, and then scrolling is started at a low speed. An effect display in which the scrolling speed gradually increases is performed.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. In this embodiment, when the background effect is executed, the operation promotion effect is always started immediately before the start of the background effect. FIG. 64C illustrates a state in which the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect). Such an operation promotion effect executed during display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect can be executed when in the normal mode A, but cannot be executed in the normal mode B. On the other hand, the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the cut-in while the decorative design of the second aspect is being displayed can be executed in the normal modes A and B.

  In the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, a normal button image simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state (see FIGS. 64C and 65A) and the effect button 26 in the protruding state are simulated. Any one of the projected button images (see FIG. 65B) is displayed together with the gauge image. The operation promotion effect (weak mode) for displaying a normal button image is an operation promotion effect that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility of being a “big hit” in the variable display during execution (for example, 10% reliability). The operation promotion effect (strong mode) for displaying the protruding button image is an operation promotion effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of being a “big hit” in the running variation display (for example, reliability 60%), This is a mode in which a highly reliable performance (for example, SPSP reach) is easier to be executed later than when executed in a weak mode (which may be executed without fail). It should be noted that the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed when it is a big hit and may not be executed when it is a loss.

  As illustrated in FIG. 65A, in the operation promotion effect (weak mode), the effect button 26 emits white light in the normal state during a predetermined effective period (for example, 3 seconds from the start of the operation promotion effect). Thus, the button lamp, which is a light emitting element built in the effect button 26, is controlled. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 65B, in the operation promotion effect (strong mode), the effect button motor and the button lamp are set so that the effect button 26 is in a protruding state and emits red light during the effective period. Be controlled. During the effective period, the frame lamp 37 is controlled to be turned off.

  For example, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 receives the data transmitted from the image sound control board 140 by executing the process of step S44 of FIG. The accessory motor is operated to change the height of the effect button 26 from the normal state to the protruding state. The production button 26 can be operated in either a normal state or a protruding state.

  When the effect button 26 is operated (for example, pressed) during the effective period, the effective period ends according to the operation, the normal button image (or the protruding button image) and the gauge image are deleted, and the background effect is started. . FIGS. 64C and 64D illustrate how the background image changes to the bird background or the night background when the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at a low speed.

  When the effect button 26 is not operated during the effective period, the operation promotion effect ends at the end timing of a predetermined effective period, and accordingly, the background image changes to a bird background or a night background. When the background effect is executed without being operated, it is easier to shift to the state in which the bird background is displayed than the night background.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the background image related to the background effect is displayed only for the changing effect being executed. The background image related to the background effect is not displayed when the character SP reach is developed, when the SPSP reach is developed, or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a break. For example, when the loss is notified in this variation effect, the default background image (FIG. 64 (A) or (B)) of the normal mode A (or normal mode B) is displayed with the stop display of the first special symbol. Will be. The reach development timing and the stop display timing of the first special symbol are both uniquely determined according to the variation pattern, and are timings that do not change regardless of whether or not there is an operation during the effective period. For this reason, for example, when the operation is performed during the effective period, the display time of the background image related to the background effect is longer than when the operation is not performed during the effective period.

  The background effect is an effect that can be executed in the normal mode A, but is an effect that cannot be executed in the normal mode B. Here, during the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the normal mode B is used, and when the variation display of the decorative symbol starts with the variation display of the first special symbol, the normal mode A may be started at the same time. Even in such a case, the background effect can be executed, and the background effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (flow from FIG. 64 (E) to (B)).

  In addition, for example, when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped in a lost aspect, the normal mode B is changed to the normal mode A (or from the normal mode A to the normal mode B), and the decorative pattern of the first aspect is displayed. May be stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol without changing the state as it is. That is, the probability that the effect mode shifts from the time when the decorative pattern of the first aspect is stopped to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect with the variation display of the first special symbol is 0%. is there. In this case, in the variable display in which the background effect is executed, the normal mode A can always be controlled at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly prevent the production from becoming complicated while at the same time smoothing the flow of the production when the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Note that the background mode BGM may be switched to the background mode BGM at the execution timing of the background effect. For example, a BGM for bird background may be output from the speaker 24 during display of a bird background, and a BGM for night background may be output during display of a night background.

<Relationship between presence / absence of operation during operation promotion effect executed immediately before start of background effect and effect mode>
With reference to FIG.66 and FIG.67, the relationship between the presence or absence of the operation in the operation promotion effect performed immediately before the start of the background effect and the effect mode of the effect after the operation promotion effect will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of the big hit. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of losing.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern for losing without reach and the variation patterns B and G are selected, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before) can be executed in the normal mode A, but the title display ( 23 and 24) cannot be executed. On the other hand, when the variation patterns C to E and H to J are selected, in the normal mode A, the background effect (and the operation promoting effect immediately before) and the title display can be executed. For this reason, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is different between the case where only the background effect is executed and the case where the background effect and the title display are executed.

  The background effect can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect. Although it is easy to shift to, it shifts to any background. In the present embodiment, such an operation promotion effect and a background effect are used as an opportunity to increase the reliability of title display, thereby adopting a configuration that gives the player motivation to operate. Although the title display is executed by the character SP reach and the SPSP reach, for convenience of explanation, the title display of the SPSP reach will be described here, and the description of the title display of the character SP reach will be omitted.

  In the case of a big hit, as an operation promotion effect executed just before the start of the background effect, an operation promotion effect in a strong mode is more likely to appear than a weak mode. When the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect, the background effect of the effect mode determined at the time of starting the change effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52) is executed. In the case of a big hit, the night background is easier to display than the bird background (FIG. 66 (A) (a) is easier to proceed to (c) than (b)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. Regardless of which of these is displayed, the title display of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect is displayed during the SPSP reach. For this reason, during the SPSP reach, any one of a blue title display, a red title display, and a rainbow title display can be displayed (FIGS. 66 (A), (b) or (c) to (d)). ) To (h).

  On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is determined to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, according to the end of the effective period A bird background may be displayed. Therefore, the night background is less likely to be displayed when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation (appearance rate in FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (c) <FIG. 66 (A) ( Appearance rate of c). In the case of a big hit, if there is no operation, the bird background may be displayed (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0 % <Appearance rate of night background <Appearance rate of bird background), Night background may be displayed more easily than bird background (appearance rate of night background> appearance rate of bird background> 0%).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and there is no operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the blue title display or the red title is displayed during the SPSP reach. While the display can be displayed, the rainbow title display is not displayed (a pattern proceeding from (b) or (c) of FIG. 66 to (d) to (g)). In addition, for example, even if it is determined to display a red title display at the start of a variable effect, a blue title display may actually be displayed.

  Thus, when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect, a title display other than the effect mode determined at the start of the variation effect may be displayed during the SPSP reach, and there is no operation during the operation promotion effect. In the case, the red title display is less likely to be displayed than in the case where there is an operation (total appearance rate of FIGS. 66 (B), (e), and (g) <FIG. 66 (A), (e), and (g). Total appearance rate). In the case of a big hit, if there is no operation, a blue title display may always be displayed (the appearance rate of red title display is 0%), or the blue title display may be easier to display than the red title display. Good (0% <appearance rate of red title display <appearance rate of blue title display). The red title display may be easier to display than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display> appearance rate of blue title display> 0%).

  In the case of losing, the weak aspect is more likely to appear as the operation promotion effect executed just before the start of the background effect than the strong operation promotion effect. When the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect, the background effect of the effect mode determined at the start of the change effect is executed. In the case of losing, it is more difficult to display the night background than the bird background (it is more difficult to proceed from FIG. 67 (a) to (c) than (b)).

  In the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. Regardless of which of these is displayed, the title display of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect is displayed during the SPSP reach. Therefore, during the SPSP reach, either the blue title display or the red title display can be displayed (pattern proceeding from (b) or (c) in FIG. 66 to (d) to (g)).

  On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is determined to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, according to the end of the effective period A bird background may be displayed. For this reason, it is more difficult to display the night background when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation. In the case of losing, the bird background may always be displayed when there is no operation (night background appearance rate 0%), or the bird background may be easier to display than the night background (0 % <Appearance rate of night background <Appearance rate of bird background), Night background may be displayed more easily than bird background (appearance rate of night background> appearance rate of bird background> 0%).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected, and when there is no operation of the effect button 26 during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, there is an operation. It is more difficult to display the red title display. In the case of losing, a blue title display may always be displayed if there is no operation (the appearance rate of red title display is 0%), or the blue title display may be easier to display than the red title display. Good (0% <appearance rate of red title display <appearance rate of blue title display). The red title display may be easier to display than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display> appearance rate of blue title display> 0%).

  Thus, when there is an operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if the bird background is displayed according to the operation, the red title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach. Further, when there is no operation, even if a night background is displayed according to the operation, a blue title display is likely to appear during SPSP reach. Thus, the presence / absence of the operation at the start of the changing effect affects not only the effect mode of the background effect executed immediately after the operation but also the effect mode during the SPSP reach. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player motivation to operate, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the player participation type effect.

  The rainbow title display can be displayed when operated, but is not displayed when it is not operated. Thereby, it is possible to give the player motivation to actively operate from the start of the variation effect.

  Here, if the background effect (or the operation promotion effect immediately before) is executed in a manner in which the jackpot is definitely announced, it will be understood that the game will suddenly become a big hit from the start of the changing effect. In this case, for example, even if an effect that enhances interest by giving an uneasy feeling to the player, such as a capture failure effect, there is a possibility that the effect of the effect cannot be effectively improved. On the other hand, for example, in the middle stage and the final stage of the fluctuating performance, if the performance related to the subsequent performance is executed as a jackpot notice, it is possible to give the player a special feeling and concentrate on the subsequent performance. Is possible. For example, there is a possibility that the production effect can be effectively enhanced by setting the title display representing the content of the battle effect of SPSP reach as a jackpot notice or the cut-in representing the content of the victory effect as a jackpot notice.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect that functions as a jackpot notice is not provided for the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before) performed at the start of the variable effect, but is provided for the title display and the cut-in. ing.

  In another embodiment, in addition to the bird background and the night background, the background effect may include a rainbow background that displays a rainbow-colored background image that functions as a jackpot notice. In addition to the weak mode and the strong mode, the operational mode of the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect includes a rainbow mode that displays a rainbow-colored protruding button image that functions as a jackpot notice. Also good. For example, when the big hit variation patterns B to E are selected, the background effect of the rainbow background and the operation promotion effect of the rainbow aspect can be executed in different random lotteries with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). . For example, after the rainbow-like operation promotion effect is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to execute or may be easily executed. Further, after the operation promotion effect other than the rainbow mode is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to execute or may be easily executed. Further, after the background effect of the rainbow background and / or the operation promotion effect of the rainbow mode is executed, the rainbow title display may be difficult to execute or may be easily executed.

  Even if there is no operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the background effect and the title display may be executed in the effect mode determined at the start of the change effect, or the rainbow title An indication may be displayed.

  The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect. Thereby, interest can be given to these effects.

For example, any of the following (1)-(4) may be sufficient as the relationship of the reliability regarding the combination of the production | presentation aspect of an operation promotion production and a background production.
(1) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode)
In the above (1), the reliability is high when the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the effect mode of the background effect, and the reliability is low when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed. The degree relationship is easy to understand.
(2) Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode)
In the above (2), there are cases where the relationship of the reliability of only the background effect is reversed. Thereby, the feeling of expectation may be enhanced more than when the night background is displayed due to the bird background being displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the bird background from being lowered. Further, even if the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is started, the game can be continued without losing expectation.
(3) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode)
In the above (3), the reliability is high when the night background is displayed and the reliability is low when the bird background is displayed, regardless of the production mode of the operation promotion effect.
(4) Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Night after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode)
In (4) above, the fall has the lowest reliability, the rise has a medium reliability, and the production modes having high reliability have the highest reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
It should be noted that the level of reliability related to the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

  In another embodiment, the operation promotion effect may not be executed immediately before the start of the background effect (appearance rate 0%) or may not be executed (appearance rate 0% or more and less than 100%). . For example, the background effect may be executed at the timing when the variation display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect is started in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol (without executing the operation promotion effect).

  Moreover, the reliability with respect to jackpot may differ with the combination of the production | presentation aspect of a background production | presentation and a title display. Thereby, interest can be given to the background effect, and it is possible to effectively enhance the interest when both the background effect and the title display are executed.

For example, any of the following (1) to (4) may be used for the relationship between the levels of reliability related to the combination of the effects of the background effect and the title display.
(1) Blue title display after bird background <Red title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after night background.
In the above (1), the reliability relationship regarding the combination of the background effect and the title display is high when the night background is executed regardless of the effect mode of the title display, and reliable when the bird background is executed. Because the degree is low, the relationship of reliability is easy to understand.
(2) Red title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after night background <Blue title display after bird background.
In (2) above, the relationship of the reliability related to the combination of the background effect and the title display may be opposite to the relationship of the reliability of only the title display. As a result, the display of the blue title display may improve the expectation in comparison with the display of the red title display, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the blue title display from being lowered. is there. Even if a bird background is displayed, the game can be continued without losing expectation.
(3) Blue title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after bird background <Red title display after night background.
In (3) above, the reliability is high when the red title display is displayed regardless of the effect mode of the background effect, and the reliability is low when the blue title display is displayed.
(4) Blue title display after night background <Blue title display after bird background <Red title display after bird background <Red title display after night background.
In (4) above, the fall has the lowest reliability, the rise has a medium reliability, and the production modes having high reliability have the highest reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
It should be noted that the level of reliability related to the combination of the background effect and the title display is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

  For example, when the variation patterns E and J capable of executing the character SP reach and the SPSP reach are selected, the background effect is executed, and the variation patterns A to D and G to which both the character SP reach and the SPSP reach cannot be performed. When the variation pattern for loss without I or reach is selected, the background effect may not be executed (appearance rate 0%). In the latter case, the appearance rate of the background effect may be lowered or increased in the latter case.

  Moreover, you may display the decoration pattern of a 2nd aspect during the operation promotion effect performed immediately before the start of a background effect. In such a case, since the decorative design (the decorative design of the first aspect) is not superimposed on the back side of the normal button image (or protruding button image) and the gauge image, the screen configuration is easy to understand, and the operation promotion effect is executed. It is easy for players to notice that

  For example, the decorative pattern of the first aspect may be displayed during the operation promotion effect (weak aspect), and the decorative pattern of the second aspect may be displayed during the operation promotion effect (strong aspect).

  Also, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) executed immediately before the start of the background effect is different from the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before cut-in during SPSP reach, such as “Press!” During the effective period. The message is not displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect may be the same as the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed during the SPSP reach.

  The background effect is an effect that does not operate the effect agent 7 and is an effect that is executed when the effect agent 7 is at the initial position. In other embodiments, the director 7 may be operated at the start timing of the background effect.

  In the present embodiment, the background effect is not executed after the reach effect is started (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other embodiments, the background effect may be executable during the SPSP reach, or may be executable in the promotion effect (first half). For example, the SPSP reach may have a higher expectation level for a jackpot when the night background is displayed than when the bird background is displayed (the jackpot may always be a jackpot). Further, in the promotion effect (first half), when the night background is displayed rather than when the bird background is displayed, the promotion success effect is more likely to be executed, and the promotion failure effect may be difficult to execute (the promotion success effect is always May be executed).

<Chance chance production>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, in the normal mode A, the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the variation patterns for losing without reach (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5). The “chance eye effect” that can be executed when a prior determination result indicating that any one of the seconds is selected will be described. The chance eye effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. “Chance eye effect” is a display that stops displaying a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) with a predetermined combination of specific numbers when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” This is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that there is a thing determined as “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. In other words, the chance eye effect is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggest in advance that a jackpot game may be performed.

  At the time of losing, immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in the same combination as the combination of numbers to be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started in conjunction with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol, the decorative pattern that has been stopped (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is slightly moved. (For example, see FIG. 74B). For this reason, the chance is that a predetermined timing (for example, 1 second after the start of the variable display) is started immediately after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before). ) Is displayed.

  Thus, during the execution of the chance eye effect, the decorative pattern of the first mode with a large number size is displayed instead of the decorative pattern of the second mode with a small size of the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. This makes it easy to understand that the chance eye has been displayed.

  There are two types of chances displayed by chance eye effects, weak chances and strong chances. The weak chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility that there is a thing determined to be a “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. In other words, this is a chance to give the player the impression that the pre-reading variation display may be a chance. The weak chances in the present embodiment are the breaks made up of three even symbols (for example, a combination of “8”, “4”, “4”: see FIG. 74A). If only weak chances are displayed before the pre-reading target variation display starts, in the pre-reading target variation display, reach may be established, but it is difficult to achieve reach. In addition, even if reach is established in the pre-reading variation display, only a low-reliability reach effect (for example, normal reach) is performed, and in most cases, a loss is notified.

  The strong chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is an item determined to be a “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. The strong chance in the present embodiment is a break composed of three odd symbols (for example, a combination of “7”, “3”, and “3”: see FIG. 75D). When a strong chance is displayed before the pre-reading target variation display starts, reach is always established during the pre-reading target variation display, and a reach effect (for example, character SP reach) is performed. In other words, the strong chance is a chance that suggests that the pre-reading variation display develops, for example, a reach production that exceeds normal reach. Therefore, it can be said that the strong chance is an effect having the same function as the blue hold icon described with reference to FIG. When a strong chance is displayed, the SPSP reach may be executed during the pre-read target variation display. For this reason, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot by displaying the strong chance before the change display of the prefetch target is started.

  In the present embodiment, chances may be displayed a plurality of times before the pre-reading variation display starts. For example, a weak chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display two times before the prefetch target, and a weak chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display one time before the prefetch target. In addition, a weak chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display two times before the prefetch target, and a strong chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display one time before the prefetch target. In addition, a strong chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display two times before the prefetch target, and a strong chance eye may be displayed in the fluctuation display one time before the prefetch target.

  As described above, when the chance item is displayed a plurality of times before the pre-reading target variation display starts, the type of the chance item displayed in the previous variation display of the pre-reading target corresponds to the jackpot of the pre-reading target variation display. It has a role to suggest reliability. Therefore, when the weak chance is displayed, the player can enjoy the chance eye effect while expecting the strong chance to be displayed before the change display of the prefetch target is started.

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a chance eye is displayed using two variable displays of the first special symbol that are continuously performed. However, a pre-read target is displayed using three or more variable displays. The chance item may be displayed three or more times before the variable display starts.

  The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a prior effect pattern when receiving a hold command from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball winning the first start port 11 (step S136 in FIG. 48). Subsequently, it is determined by random lottery whether or not to execute the chance eye effect. When it is determined that the chance eye effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 131 determines by random number lottery what effect pattern the chance eye effect is to be executed.

  By the way, the derivation display of the chance eye is performed using the fluctuation of the reachless loss. For this reason, if it is determined to execute the chance eye effect based on the pre-determination target pre-determination result, whether or not all the variation effects related to the variation display executed before the variation display of the prefetch target are non-reach effects Is determined, and when there is at least one variation effect in which an effect with reach is performed, control is performed such that the chance eye effect is not executed.

  Note that whether or not to execute the chance eye effect may be determined by the following process. Specifically, when a pre-determination result (for example, a pre-determination result indicating a variation pattern capable of executing a reach effect) is obtained when a hold command is received, the sub CPU 131 Then, it is determined whether or not the variation effect related to the variation display executed before the variation display of the pre-read target includes a reach effect. Then, the sub CPU 131 determines not to execute the chance eye effect if it is determined to be included, and determines to execute the chance eye effect if it is determined not to be included.

<Design change production>
The chance eye effect is an effect provided with a function that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot of the prefetch target. For this reason, it is preferable that the player can easily recognize which chance item has been displayed in the previous variation display even after the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the form of the chance item has started variation display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing a part (or all) of the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) displayed in the chance eye form, it is suggested that the game may be a big hit, and the chance eye The “symbol change effect” is executed to suggest that the effect has been executed. Note that the symbol change effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative pattern of the first aspect, and is therefore an effect that displays an image with a wide display area for the entire screen.

  In the present embodiment, when the chance eye effect is executed, the symbol change effect is always executed. For this reason, in the normal mode A, the pattern change effect is the change pattern B to E, G to J, or all the reach-less variation patterns (for example, the change time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, And any one of 13.5 seconds) is an effect that can be executed when a pre-determination result indicating that selection is made is obtained. Note that the symbol change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. Also, the symbol change effect is one of the reliability suggesting effects that suggest in advance that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be performed.

  FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining a chance eye effect and a symbol change effect. As illustrated in FIG. 68 (A), when the chance eye effect is not executed, the decorative display accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative display accompanying the stop display (lost notification) of the first special symbol are displayed. The symbol stop display (break stop display) is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the chance eye effect is executed, the weak chance eye may be stopped and displayed in the variation effect immediately before the prefetch target, and the strong chance eye may be displayed in the variation effect immediately before the prefetch object ( FIG. 68 (B)). In such a case, at the start of the variation effect immediately before the prefetch target, a symbol change effect is executed that suggests that the weak chance eye was displayed in the variation effect two times before the prefetch target. Specifically, among three even symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) that form weak chances, the numbers constituting the even symbols are changed from a default color (for example, blue) to a predetermined color (in this embodiment, green). An effect display that changes all at once is performed.

  In addition, when a strong chance eye is displayed in the variation effect immediately before the prefetch target, it indicates that the strong chance eye was displayed in the variation effect immediately before the prefetch target when the variation effect of the prefetch target is started. A symbol change effect is executed. Specifically, among the three odd symbols that form strong chance eyes (decoration pattern of the first aspect), the numbers constituting the odd symbols are changed from the default color (for example, green) to a color other than the predetermined color (this embodiment) In the form, an effect display that is changed to red at the same time is performed.

  In addition, during the symbol change effect, the decorative symbol forming the chance eye is slightly moved. The timing at which the decorative symbol changed by the symbol change effect is returned to the default state may be when scrolling is started, when it is no longer displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 by scrolling, or during high-speed scrolling.

  In this way, when the variable display is started, the pre-read target may become a big hit by executing the symbol change effect that changes the element related to the color of the decorative symbol using the decorative symbol that was stopped. It is possible to suggest. There are two types of design change effects: a mode in which an element related to the color of the decorative design is changed to red, and a mode in which the element is changed to green. The mode of changing to red is a design change effect in a mode that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility that there is something determined to be “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. The mode of changing to green is a design change effect in a mode that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is something determined as “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. When the symbol change effect is executed in a mode of changing to red, the reliability for the big hit of the prefetch target is higher than that in the case of executing in a mode of changing to green.

  The symbol change effect is executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode with a large number size, not the decorative pattern of the second mode with a small size of the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. Thereby, it can be made easy to understand in what kind of effect the pattern change effect is executed.

  In addition, the symbol change effect is executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode having high decorativeness, not the decorative pattern of the second mode having low decorative property. Thereby, the decorativeness of the decorative pattern of the first aspect which is originally high can be further enhanced by the design change effect. Thereby, it is possible to make a gorgeous impression at the start of the fluctuating effect.

  In addition, the effect display which changes only the color of the clothes of the character attached | subjected to the number which comprises a decorative design with the effect display of the symbol change effect mentioned above (or replacing with the effect display of the symbol change effect mentioned above). May be performed. For example, in a pattern change effect that suggests that a weak chance eye is displayed, the clothes of the character are changed to green all at once, and in a pattern change effect that suggests that a strong chance eye is displayed, the character's clothes are changed. You may change to red all at once.

  The chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are effects that are uniquely determined by linking to the variation pattern of the first special symbol whose execution timing is before the prefetch target. For this reason, the execution interval when the chance eye effect is executed twice or more is not constant, and the execution interval when the symbol change effect is executed twice or more is not constant. On the other hand, the execution interval between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect immediately thereafter is constant no matter how many times these effects are executed.

  In other embodiments, the symbol change effect may be executed without executing the chance eye effect. In this case, by executing the symbol change effect using the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) that has been stopped and displayed when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, It is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that there is a thing determined to be “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination.

  In another embodiment, the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect may be configured as one effect. Further, the chance eye effect may be configured as an effect accompanied by an effect display in which the periphery of the decorative pattern is emitted with a light emission color corresponding to the strength of the chance eye when the decorative symbol forming the chance eye is stopped and displayed. .

  Moreover, in other embodiment, there may exist the aspect which functions as a jackpot notice which definitely announces that it will be a big hit, in the aspect of the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect. When E is selected, it may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%).

  The chance eye effect and the design change effect are effects that do not cause the effect character 7 to operate, and are effects that are executed when the effect character 7 is in the initial position. In another embodiment, the stage actor 7 may be operated at the start timing of the symbol change stage without operating the stage actor 7 in the chance eye stage.

  In this embodiment, the chance eye effect and the symbol background effect are not executed after the start of the reach effect (that is, the appearance rate is 0% for both). In other embodiments, the chance eye effect and the symbol background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed in the promotion effect (first half). For example, in SPSP reach, instead of a reach symbol, a chance eye may be displayed, and when a strong chance eye is displayed rather than a weak chance eye, the degree of expectation for the jackpot may be higher. In addition, for example, in SPSP reach, it is possible to execute a design change effect that changes the color of the numbers constituting the decorative design (reach design) from the default color to another color, and the reach design color of the even number design is changed from the default color to green. It is also possible to change the reach pattern color of the odd number design from the default color to red. Reach symbols can be displayed in default colors, green, and red, and the reliability for jackpots is higher in this order. In addition, for example, in the promotion effect (first half), a design change effect that changes the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode from the default color to another color may be executed, and the color of the decorative pattern in the jackpot mode is different from the default color. The color (for example, red) has a higher probability of shifting to the probability change gaming state (for example, shifting with a probability of 100%).

<Relationship between reliability suggestion production>
With reference to FIG. 69, the relationship between the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed in the normal mode A will be described. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for describing a relationship between reliability suggesting effects. As described above, the hold icon change effect, the icon change effect, the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the story pseudo-continuous effect can be executed when the effect is executed in the normal mode A or the normal mode B. It is a degree suggestion. The background effect (and the operation promotion effect), the chance eye effect, and the symbol change effect are reliability suggestion effects that can be executed when the effect is executed in the normal mode A.

When a certain degree of reliability suggestion effect is executed in a mode with high reliability, when it is not executed in a mode with high reliability (specifically, when it is executed in a mode with low reliability and when it is not even executed) In comparison, a plurality of reliability suggestion effects are likely to be executed in a highly reliable manner and are likely to be big hits. For example, regarding background effects, the following can be said when a highly reliable night background is executed, compared to when a bird background with low reliability is executed.
-Prior to the start of the variable display when the night background is executed, the hold icon is likely to become a color with high reliability (that is, the hold icon change effect and the pre-effect are easily executed in a highly reliable manner (even if it is always executed) Good)).
-The chance eye effect and the symbol change effect that pre-reads this variable display are easy to execute before starting the variable display in which the night background is executed and in the variable display in which the night background is executed (may be always executed). ).
In the variable display in which the night background is executed, other reliability suggesting effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are likely to be executed (may be always executed).
The same applies to the case where the reliability suggestion effect other than the background effect is executed in a highly reliable effect mode. For this reason, in some cases, a situation in which all these executions are determined may occur.

  However, depending on the aspect of each effect, there is a risk that simultaneous execution may feel redundant or excessive. In addition, the amount of image data increases, and processing may be lost, or frames may be dropped due to double buffering.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a prohibition condition is provided in advance between the reliability suggesting effects for the following reasons. In addition, there are cases where the contents of change when the prohibition condition is satisfied are defined.

  The relationship between the reserved icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG.

  First, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the same effect image as the icon change suggestion image displayed in the icon change effect is used as the hold change suggestion image displayed in the hold icon change effect. For this reason, if these two types of effects are executed simultaneously, it is difficult to understand what is happening, which may lead to a complicated impression. In addition, for example, when the hold icon and the icon change at the same time, and the icon changes to a more reliable aspect (for example, gold), the expectation for the jackpot is expected for the variation effect corresponding to the icon. There is a high possibility of embrace. In such a case, if a loss notification is given in the variation effect corresponding to the icon, there is a possibility that a sense of expectation may not be held with respect to the hold icon which is a mode with lower reliability (for example, green). In addition, for example, when the hold icon is changed to a mode with high reliability (for example, a rainbow color indicating a big hit), there is a high possibility that the user will not be interested in the variation effect being executed.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “the icon change effect” in the row of FIG. 69A, it is assumed that the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect cannot be executed at the same time, and the execution of one effect is determined. In this case, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. “Control not to execute” means, for example, that when the execution of one effect is determined, the random number lottery process itself for determining whether to execute the other effect is not executed. Can be considered.

  In another embodiment, the icon change effect may be executed during execution of the hold icon change effect, or the hold icon change effect may be executed during execution of the icon change effect. In addition, for example, it may be controlled such that an effect relating to a more reliable aspect is executed and an effect relating to a less reliable aspect is executed.

  Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described.

  Regarding the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, for example, when the hold icon is changed to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a jackpot), the user is interested in the changing effect being executed. There is a high possibility of disappearing. Further, in the present embodiment, when a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color indicating the number of pseudo-continuations (for example, green indicating pseudo-second) along the inner periphery of the screen. Is displayed. Since the pseudo continuous effect image is displayed superimposed on the near side of the hold icon, the visibility of the hold icon is lowered. For this reason, even if the hold icon change effect is executed during display of the pseudo-continuous effect image and the color of the hold icon changes, the effect may not be improved effectively.

  Regarding the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect, the story pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that draws attention to the story image displayed on the entire screen and the effect sound related to the contents of this image. During such an effect, for example, if a hold change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or an effect sound related to the hold icon change effect (for example, an effect sound such as “picone”) is output, The player's consciousness shifts to the hold icon. In addition, the production sound related to the story pseudo-continuous production makes it difficult to hear the production sound related to the on-hold icon change production, and both productions may be less interesting.

  Therefore, as shown in the columns of “normal pseudo-continuous effects” and “story pseudo-continuous effects” in the row of FIG. 69 (A), it is assumed that the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect cannot be executed at the same time. The production and the story pseudo-continuous production cannot be executed at the same time.

  For example, when the execution timing of the hold icon change effect comes during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (normal pseudo-continuous effect and story pseudo-continuous effect), the variable effect related to the pseudo-continuous effect ends and the next change The execution of the hold icon change effect is carried over until the effect starts. For example, when execution of the hold icon change effect is determined, the number of executions of the pseudo icon effect is reduced, or the pseudo effect is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the execution timing of the hold icon change effect. Be controlled.

  In other embodiments, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during execution of the hold icon change effect, or a hold icon change effect may be executed during execution of the pseudo-continuation effect. Further, the hold icon change effect and the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed simultaneously when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or higher (for example, gold or higher), and changes to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color. May be controlled not to execute the hold icon change effect. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the hold icon change effect is executed. May be executed.

  Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hold change suggestion image displayed in the hold icon change effect is an image with a narrow display area for the entire screen. On the other hand, the bird background and night background displayed in the background effect are images with a wide display area. For this reason, even if these two types of effects are executed simultaneously, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “background effect (operation promotion effect)” in the row of FIG. 69A, the hold icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable simultaneously. In other words, the background effect can be executed while the hold icon change effect is being executed, and the hold icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

  In another embodiment in which the hold change suggestion image is an image having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the hold icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed simultaneously. Good. This is because if the reserved change suggestion image makes the background image completely (or almost) invisible and the background image has changed before long, the production may become complicated as a result. In such a case, for example, when execution of one effect is determined, it may be controlled not to execute the other effect at the same timing. Also, for example, when the execution timing of the hold icon change effect arrives during the execution of the background effect, the hold icon change effect is performed until the change effect related to the background effect ends and the next change effect starts. May be carried over.

  In another embodiment, when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the reliability is lower than the predetermined color. When changing, the background effect may be executed without executing the hold icon change effect. Also, for example, when the night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect. Also good.

  Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described. The hold icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the hold icon, and the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is an effect that draws attention to the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect). If these two types of effects are executed at the same time, for example, the pending change image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative symbol, so that the visibility of the decorative symbol is reduced and the overall effect may be difficult to understand. is there. Moreover, there is a possibility that it is difficult to hear the effect sound related to the hold icon change effect due to the effect sound (for example, the effect sound such as “Zugo”) output from the speaker 24 during the execution of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect).

  Therefore, as shown in the columns of “chance eye effect” and “symbol change effect” in the row of FIG. 69A, it is assumed that the hold icon change effect and these effects cannot be executed simultaneously.

  In other embodiments, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executable during the execution of the hold icon change effect, or the hold icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect). It may be executable. For example, when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect), and the reliability is higher than the predetermined color. When changing to a lower color, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executed without executing the hold icon change effect. Also, for example, when a strong chance eye is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when a weak chance eye is displayed, the chance eye effect (and symbol) is displayed. The hold icon change effect may be executed without executing the change effect).

  Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG. 69 (B).

  First, the relationship between the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect will be described. Both the pseudo-continuous effect image displayed in the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the icon change suggestion image displayed in the icon change effect are images having a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen. When these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the changing effects being executed due to the synergistic effect.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “normal pseudo-continuous effects” in the row of FIG. 69B, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effects are controlled to be executable simultaneously. That is, the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, and the icon change effect can be executed while the normal pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more) due to the icon change effect, the number of executions of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is larger (for example, twice) than when the icon does not change to the predetermined color. It may be easy, and a normal pseudo-continuous production may always be executed.

  In other embodiments, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed at the same time. For example, when execution of one effect is determined, control may be performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. Also, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed simultaneously, and when the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color. The normal pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. Further, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more), the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change is performed. An effect may be executed.

  Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described. As described above, the story pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that draws attention to the story image and the effect sound related to the content of the image. During such an effect, for example, if an icon change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or an effect sound related to the icon change effect (for example, an effect sound such as “Shwer”) is output, The player's consciousness shifts to the icon. Further, the effect sound related to the story pseudo-continuous effect makes it difficult to hear the effect sound related to the icon change effect, and there is a risk that both effects may be less interesting.

  Therefore, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect cannot be executed at the same time as shown in the “story pseudo-continuous effect” column in the row of FIG. 69 (B). For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, and the icon changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color. A story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. Further, when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two times or more), the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change is performed. An effect may be executed.

  In another embodiment, the story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, or the icon change effect may be executable while the story pseudo-effect is being executed. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), it can be executed simultaneously. When the icon changes to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color, the icon pseudo-continuation is not executed without executing the icon change effect. An effect may be executed. Also, if the story pseudo-continuous production is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more), the story pseudo-continuous production is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number, it can be executed simultaneously. It is good.

  Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In this embodiment, the icon change suggestion image is an image with a narrow display area, and the bird background and the night background displayed in the background effect are images with a wide display area. For this reason, even if these two types of effects are executed simultaneously, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “background effect (operation promotion effect)” in the row of FIG. 69B, the icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable simultaneously. That is, the background effect can be executed while the icon change effect is being executed, and the icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

  In other embodiments in which the icon change suggestion image is an image having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed simultaneously. Good. This is because the background image is completely (or almost) invisible due to the icon change suggestion image, and the background image may have changed without any explanation, which may give a rough impression. In such a case, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the color changes to a color with lower reliability than the predetermined color. In this case, the background effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, when a background effect that displays a night background is executed, the background effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when a background effect that displays a bird background is executed, the background effect is executed. Instead, the icon change effect may be executed.

  Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed when the icon becomes blue or more. On the other hand, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) is executed using the change effect related to the non-reach effect. For this reason, the icon change effect is not executed in the variation display before the prefetch target. In addition, when the look-ahead object of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) corresponds to the icon change effect, the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) can be executed simultaneously.

  In other embodiments, in any case, the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may not be executed simultaneously or may be executed simultaneously.

  Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG.

  As for the relationship between the normal pseudo-series effect and the story pseudo-series effect, any one type of pseudo-series effect can be executed in one variation effect. For this reason, a situation in which a normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the pseudo first series and a story pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the pseudo second series does not occur. In addition, these two types of pseudo-continuous effects are not executed simultaneously.

  Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect image is an image having a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen, and the background image is an image having a wide display area. For this reason, even if these two types of effects are executed simultaneously, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen. In addition, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for the changing production being executed due to a synergistic effect.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “background effect (operation promotion effect)” in the row of FIG. 69 (C), the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable simultaneously. That is, the background effect can be executed while the normal pseudo-continuous effect is being executed, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed. For example, when the night background is executed, the number of times of execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be easier (for example, twice) than when the bird background is executed without executing the night background. Continuous production may be executed.

  Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, these effects are not executed at the same time because the execution timing is different. This also applies to the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous effect and the chance eye effect (and symbol change effect) ("chance eye effect" and "symbol change effect" in the rows of FIGS. 69 (C) and (D)). Column).

  In other embodiments, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect), or the chance eye effect (and the pattern change effect). ) May be able to be executed during execution. Specifically, for example, by making the chance eye function as a pseudo-continuous pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed in response to the chance eye being pseudo-stopped. A design change effect may be performed.

  Next, the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous effect and other effects will be described with reference to the row in FIG. 69 (D).

  A relationship between the story pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. As described above, both the story image and the background image are images that have a wide display area with respect to the entire screen and are displayed on the entire screen. For example, even if the background image is changed on the back side of the story image, the background image cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, there is a possibility that the background image is changed without any explanation and a rough impression may be given.

  Therefore, as shown in the column of “background effect (operation promotion effect)” in the row of FIG. 69D, it is assumed that the story pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time, and execution of one effect is determined. If so, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. That is, the background effect can be executed when the number of executions of the story pseudo-continuous effect is small (specifically, 0 times), and the background effect is not executed when the number of executions of the story pseudo-continuous effect is large (for example, twice). . Specifically, for example, when the variation pattern for reach-less loss whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, the background effect can be executed, and when the variation patterns D, I, and J are selected. When the story pseudo-run is executed twice, the background effect need not be executed.

  In other embodiments, for example, when a story pseudo-continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more), the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect, and is executed less than the predetermined number of times. In the case of a background, a background effect may be executed. Also, for example, when a night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the story effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the story effect is executed without executing the background effect. Also good.

  It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effects (normal pseudo-rendition effects and story pseudo-reams) may be executed during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach. The relationship with the effect may be the same as described with reference to the rows of FIGS. 69 (C) and 69 (D). In the following description, the pseudo-continuous effect that is executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect is referred to as a pre-reach pseudo-ream, and the pseudo-continuous effect that is executed after the reach is established is referred to as a post-reach pseudo-ream.

  It should be noted that reach is always established after the post-reach pseudo-continuation, but there are cases where reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the post-reach pseudo-continuation and when reach is established with different reach symbols. For example, after reaching reach with an even number of symbols, reach may be established again with an even number of symbols and via reaching a pseudo-ream after reaching, and the latter may be reached with the odd number of symbols. However, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may be high, or it may be easy to win. For example, if a reach is reached with 7 symbols via a post-reach pseudo-continuous production, a big hit may be made.

  For example, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may be different depending on the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Specifically, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, only the pre-reach pseudo-run, the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-run, and only the post-reach pseudo-run are displayed. It may be executed, and the rate of development to SPSP reach in this order may be high or low. Note that the SPSP reach may be executed whenever the post-reach pseudo-ream is executed.

  The reliability with respect to the jackpot of the post-reach pseudo-run may be higher than that of the pre-reach pseudo-run, may be substantially the same, or may be lower. For example, the reliability when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once during the first special symbol variation display is relatively low, but if the pseudo-continuous effect is a post-reach pseudo-ream, the reliability is very high. As such (for example, the reliability is 70%), the appearance rates of the post-reach pseudo-ream and the pre-reach pseudo-ream may be determined in advance. The SPSP reach may be executed more easily (may be executed without fail) when a highly reliable pseudo-continuous production is executed.

  When the post-reach quasi-ream is performed during normal reach, the flow is almost the same as the effect described with reference to FIG. 62 except that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed after the reach is established, not before the reach is established. Is done. Although a detailed description is omitted, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol between a left symbol and a right symbol constituting a reach symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect). Then, all the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are restarted, and after that, reach is always established again with the decorative symbols of the first aspect.

  Except for the fact that pseudo-continuous production is performed in the state in which the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed instead of the decorative pattern of the first mode when the post-reach pseudo-ream is performed during the character SP reach or the SPSP reach 62, an effect having a flow substantially similar to the effect described with reference to FIG. 62 is performed. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, when the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach symbol (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) are pseudo-stopped at the upper left corner of the screen, The design is pseudo-stopped. And it will be in the state where all the decoration designs of the 1st mode are restarted from the state where the reach design was displayed. After that, reach is always established again with the decorative pattern of the first mode. For example, the second mode is displayed from the state where the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed in the same manner as the effect display described with reference to FIGS. 10 (E) to (G). The decorative design of is displayed. In some cases, reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the post-reach pseudo-ream, but reach may be established with different reach symbols.

  The post-reach quasi-ream can be executed during the contention stage during the character SP reach and does not have to be executed at other timings, but can be executed during the battle stage during the SPSP reach and executed at other timings. It does not have to be.

  Next, the relationship between the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described with reference to the row in FIG. 69 (E).

  The background effect is an effect that draws attention on how the background image changes. If a chance eye is displayed on the near side of the background image, the change in the background image may be difficult to understand. Therefore, as shown in the columns of “chance eye effect” and “symbol change effect” in the row of FIG. 69 (E), these effects cannot be executed simultaneously. For example, when it is determined that the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) is not executed, the background effect can be executed, and in the opposite case, the background image is not executed.

  Regarding the relationship between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect, as described above, since the symbol change effect is an effect that uses the chance eye, these effects can be executed simultaneously (the “design in the row of FIG. 69 (F)”. Change direction column). That is, the symbol change effect can be executed while the chance eye effect is being executed, and the chance eye effect can be executed while the symbol change effect is being executed.

[Specific example: Pattern in which background effect and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 70 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the background effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 70 shows a specific example of effects executed when any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected. It is assumed that the operation promotion effect, the background effect that displays the bird background, and one normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed during the pre-reach effect at the start of the change effect.

  FIG. 70 (A) shows the determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A. A state in which a losing notification effect in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the result is lost is stopped and displayed is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is in blue hold in response to the hold icon change effect being executed.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the first special symbol is changed and displayed. Is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). FIG. 70B shows a state where the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed and the blue hold is not changed and is shifted to the area 53 and displayed as the blue icon. Illustrated. In addition, the scroll speed of the decorative pattern of the first mode that started scrolling downward is gradually increasing, and the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed as the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the decorative symbol variation display starts. The state of being done is illustrated.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends as the effective period ends according to the operation. Then, the background effect is executed in accordance with the operation, whereby the background image changes to a bird background (see FIG. 70C). FIG. 70C illustrates a state in which the left symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in a state where the bird background is displayed by executing the background effect.

  Thereafter, when the right symbol (the decorative pattern of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped while the bird background is displayed, the pseudo-simultaneous symbol effect is executed when the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol (FIG. 70D). reference). Since the specific example of the production mode of the normal pseudo-continuous production has been described above with reference to FIG. 62 (A), the description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 70 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol (both of the decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped in a state where the bird background is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting execution of a normal pseudo-continuous effect. Is a pseudo-stop as an intermediate symbol. In FIG. 70E, characters indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 2” and a pseudo-continuous effect image are displayed in a state where a bird background is displayed. Is illustrated.

  When reach is established with 4 symbols in the second pseudo sequence, for example, it is notified that reach has been established with reach establishment. The fact that the reach has been established means that a white reach line is superimposed on the front side of the reach symbol (decoration symbol of the first aspect) for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIG. 70E) or “reach!” The voice of the character (hereinafter referred to as “reach establishment sound”) is output from the speaker 24 and notified. These are effects that suggest that the reach effect is started, and are effects that indicate that the reliability for the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect is not executed.

  When the normal reach is started with the bird background displayed after the reach is established, the losing may be notified at the end of the normal reach with the bird background displayed (pattern from (F) to (G) in FIG. 70). . Further, the bird background is erased at the end of the normal reach and develops into the character SP reach, and the winning is notified at the end of the character SP reach (pattern from (F) to (H) in FIG. 70).

  Note that there is a case where the jackpot is notified at the end of normal reach (pattern from FIG. 70 (F) to (I)). In FIG. 70 (I), the display of the bird background is continued, while the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the jackpot mode (the decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped in a pseudo manner. This is illustrated. The bird background is erased following the example shown in FIG. 70 (I), and the first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect are similar to the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (A). Will be executed.

  Further, when the bird background is erased after the reach is established, the SPSP reach may be developed via (or without) the character SP reach, and the winning event may be notified at the end of the SPSP reach (FIG. 70E). , (J), (K) in this order).

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect (a jackpot notice), the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 71 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the icon change effect (big jackpot notice), the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 71 shows a specific example of effects executed when any one of the variation patterns B to E for jackpots of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, at the time of starting the variation effect, the icon change effect (a jackpot notice) that changes the icon to a rainbow, an operation promotion effect, a background effect that displays a night background, and a single normal pseudo-ream effect are reached. It is assumed that it is determined to be executed during the previous performance.

  In FIG. 71 (A), as in FIG. 70 (A), in the normal mode A, in the state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, the icon displayed in the area 53 is displayed. A state in which a losing notification effect in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) of a mode indicating that the corresponding determination result of the first special symbol determination is a losing is displayed is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is in blue hold in response to the hold icon change effect being executed.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 71A and 71B). In FIG. 71 (B), the decoration pattern of the first mode is scroll-displayed in a state where the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the blue hold remains unchanged and the area 53 is not changed. It is shifted and displayed as a blue icon, and the state where the icon change effect is executed is illustrated. The icon change effect is executed in such a manner as to display an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes to a rainbow, and functions as a jackpot notice that provides a definite notice that the icon will be a big hit. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon is changed to a rainbow-colored icon that functions as a jackpot notice that definitely notifies that the jackpot will be won. In the example shown in FIG. 71B, the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed by starting the operation promotion effect immediately after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends as the effective period ends according to the operation. Then, a background effect is executed according to the operation, whereby the background image changes to a night background (see FIG. 71C). In FIG. 71 (C), the rainbow-colored icon (a jackpot notice) is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left symbol (decoration symbol of the first aspect) is displayed. A state in which is falsely stopped is illustrated.

  After that, when the night background is displayed and the pseudo-continuous design suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 71D). In FIG. 71D, the left symbol and the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first mode) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped with the night background and the rainbow-colored icon displayed. The situation is illustrated. In FIG. 71 (E), a character indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 2” and a pseudo-continuous effect image are displayed in a state in which the night background is displayed. Is illustrated.

  When reach is established with 3 symbols in the second pseudo sequence, for example, a white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) as the reach is established (see FIG. 71E), or the reach establishment sound is heard from the speaker. 24. If the normal reach is started with the night background displayed after the reach is established, the night background is erased at the end of this normal reach and develops into the character SP reach, and the jackpot may be notified at the end of the character SP reach ( FIG. 71 (F) proceeds to (G)).

  Further, there is a case where the jackpot is notified at the end of the normal reach (pattern from FIG. 71 (F) to (H)). In FIG. 71 (H), the display of the night background is continued, but the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative pattern of the big hit mode (the decorative pattern of the first mode) is stopped in a pseudo manner. This is illustrated.

  Further, when the night background is erased after the reach is established, the SPSP reach is developed through (or without) the character SP reach, and the jackpot is notified at the end of the SPSP reach (FIG. 71 (E), (I ) And (J) in this order).

  In this specific example, in any pattern, similarly to the flow described with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12A, before the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. The first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect are executed (see FIGS. 11 and 12A).

  In FIG. 71, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is executed during the operation promotion effect, and the prior effect as a jackpot notice (effect that displays the rainbow-colored icon) is during the background effect, the pseudo-ream effect, and the reach. It is executed during the production to notify the establishment. For this reason, in the flow of FIG. 71, for example, the reach symbol is relatively more reliable than the flow of FIG. 70 in which the jackpot notice is not executed during these effects (that may be lost). It is easy to become 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), and the SPSP reach with high reliability is executed at a high rate, and the rate of jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 72 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of effects executed when any one of the variation patterns D, E, I, and J of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, at the time of the start of the change effect, the icon change effect that changes the icon to blue, the operation promotion effect, the background effect that displays the night background, and the two normal pseudo-continuous effects are performed during the pre-reach effect. Assume that it is decided to be executed.

  FIG. 72A shows the determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A. A state in which a losing notification effect in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the result is lost is stopped and displayed is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

  After the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 72A and 72B). In FIG. 72 (B), the decoration pattern of the first mode is scroll-displayed in the state where the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed. The state of being shifted and displayed as the white icon and the icon change effect being executed is illustrated. The icon change effect is executed in such a manner that an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes to blue is displayed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 72B, the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed when the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation, and the background effect changes to the night background (FIG. 72 ( C)). In FIG. 72 (C), the icon changed to blue is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left symbol (decoration symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is illustrated.

  After that, when the night background is displayed and the pseudo-continuous design suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 72D). In FIG. 72 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first aspect) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped with the night background and the blue icon displayed. Is illustrated.

  In the second pseudo sequence, when the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed, thereby starting the variable display of the pseudo third sequence ( (See FIG. 72E). In FIG. 72 (E), the left symbol, the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first aspect), and the pseudo-continuity are displayed in a state where the characters indicating the night background, the pseudo-continuity number, and the pseudo-ream effect image are displayed. The state that the symbol is pseudo-stopped is illustrated.

  When reach is established with 4 symbols in the pseudo 3rd series, for example, a white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) along with reach establishment (see FIG. 72 (F)), or reach establishment sound is heard from the speaker. 24. In FIG. 72 (F), a red pseudo-ream effect image is displayed along the inner edge of the screen with a night background and a character indicating a pseudo-continuous number such as “× 3” displayed. The state in which the reach is established in the pseudo third series is illustrated.

  When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and the winning is notified at the end of this SPSP reach (FIGS. 72 (F), (G), (Pattern that advances in the order of (I), or pattern that advances in the order of (F), (H), (I)).

  In the case of a big hit (that is, when the variation patterns D and E are selected), in the same manner as the flow described with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. The first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect are executed before the decorative pattern) is stopped and displayed.

[Specific example: Pattern in which the icon change effect (a jackpot notice), the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 73 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the icon change effect (big jackpot notice), the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of effects executed when any one of the variation patterns D and E for jackpots of the first special symbol is selected. In addition, at the start of the change effect, the icon change effect (a jackpot notice) that changes the icon to blue and then changes to a rainbow, an operation promotion effect, a background effect that displays a night background, and two times It is assumed that it is determined that the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the pre-reach effect.

  FIG. 73A shows the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, as in FIG. A state in which a losing notification effect in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) of a mode indicating that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is lost is stopped is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

  After the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 73A and 73B). In FIG. 73 (B), the decoration pattern of the first mode is scroll-displayed in the state where the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the white hold is not changed and the area 53 is not changed. The state of being shifted and displayed as the white icon and the icon change effect being executed is illustrated. The icon change effect is executed in such a manner that an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes to blue is displayed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 73 (B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed when the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation, and the background effect changes to the night background (FIG. 73 ( C)). In FIG. 73 (C), the icon changed to blue is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left symbol (decoration symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is illustrated. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the icon change effect (big hit notice) that displays an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes to a rainbow is executed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon is changed to the rainbow icon (a jackpot notice).

  After that, when the night background is displayed and the pseudo-continuous design suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 73D). In FIG. 73 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first mode) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are simulated in a state where the night background and the rainbow-colored icon (the jackpot notice) are displayed. A state of stopping is illustrated.

  After that, when the pseudo-continuous design suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol in the second pseudo-sequence, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed to start the variable display of the pseudo third sequence. (See FIG. 73E). FIG. 73 (E) shows the left design and the right design (both in the first mode) in a state where the night background, the rainbow-colored icon, the characters indicating the pseudo-continuous number, and the pseudo-continuous effect image are displayed. A state in which the decorative symbol) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped is illustrated.

  When reach is established with 3 symbols in the pseudo third series, for example, a white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with reach establishment (see FIG. 73F), or reach establishment sound is heard from the speaker. 24. FIG. 73 (F) shows a pseudo third series in a state in which a night background, a rainbow-colored icon, a letter indicating a pseudo series such as “× 3”, and a red pseudo series effect image are displayed. The state where the reach is achieved is illustrated.

  When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and a jackpot is notified at the end of this SPSP reach (FIGS. 73 (F), (G), (Pattern that advances in the order of (I), or pattern that advances in the order of (F), (H), (I)). Before the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, the first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the flow described with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. The second reflection effect is executed.

  In FIG. 73, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is executed during the background effect, and the prior effect (an effect of displaying the rainbow-colored icon) as the jackpot notice is during the background effect, the pseudo-ream effect, and the reach is established. It is executed during the production of informing the user. For this reason, in the flow of FIG. 73, for example, the reach symbol is relatively more reliable than the flow of FIG. 72 in which the jackpot notice is not executed during these effects (that may be lost). It is easy to become 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), and the SPSP reach with high reliability is executed at a high rate, and the rate of jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Specific example: Pattern in which chance eye effect and symbol change effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 74 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 74 is an effect executed in the normal mode A when a prior determination result indicating that any one of the variation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. A specific example is shown. In addition, when the display of the hold icon related to the prefetch target is started, a chance eye effect and a symbol change effect are displayed in which the weak chance eyes are displayed in the variation effect two times before and one time before the prefetch target. It is assumed that it has been decided.

  In FIG. 74 (A), two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, and three weak chances are formed at the end of the two-previous variation effect to be read ahead. The state where the even number symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed and the loss is notified is illustrated. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold, and the hold icon related to the prefetch target is blue hold in response to execution of the hold icon change effect.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even symbols forming the weak chance eye, the first special symbol determination immediately before the prefetch target is executed. Thus, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the first white hold is displayed as the icon without change, and the blue hold related to the prefetch target is shifted and displayed on the region 53 side (FIG. 74A and FIG. 74). (See (B)).

  At the same time that the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbols constituting the three even symbols that have been stopped and displayed in a manner of forming weak chance eyes are displayed in the default color ( For example, the color is simultaneously changed from blue to green (see FIG. 74B). During the symbol change effect, the even symbols that form the weak chances are finely moved.

  Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 74C, the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) starts scrolling downward and the scroll speed is gradually increased, and the high-speed scroll is performed. Then, the scrolling speed gradually decreases, and for example, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Here, since it is determined in advance that the weak chance eyes are displayed in the variation effect immediately before the prefetch target, as illustrated in FIG. 74D, the three chance chance eyes are formed. The even number symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed after being pseudo-stopped.

  When a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the first even special symbol and the three even symbols forming the weak chance eye, the first special symbol determination relating to the prefetch target is executed, and the first special symbol Fluctuation display is started. Along with this, the blue hold related to the prefetch target is displayed as the icon without changing as it is (see FIG. 74E).

  At the same time that the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbols constituting the even symbols that are finely moved in a form that forms a weak chance eye are executed in a default color (for example, blue). To green at the same time (see FIG. 74E). Thereafter, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at a high speed and then pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 74 (F)). In addition, when it is determined to execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of starting the variable effect related to the prefetch target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before developing to the reach effect.

[Specific example: Pattern in which chance eye effect, symbol change effect, and icon change effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 75 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 75 shows a specific example of the effect executed in the normal mode A when a prior determination result indicating that any one of the variation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. Show. In addition, when the display of the hold icon relating to the prefetch target is started, a chance chance effect is displayed in which the weak chance eye is displayed in the second variation effect of the prefetch target, and the strong chance item is displayed in the previous variation effect. It is assumed that the symbol change effect is determined to be executed. In addition, it is determined that the icon change effect (a jackpot notice) for changing the icon to a rainbow is executed when the change effect related to the prefetch target is started.

  Since the flow from FIGS. 75A to 75C is the same as that in FIGS. 74A to 74C, description thereof is omitted here. As illustrated in FIG. 75D, in the fluctuating effect immediately before the prefetch target, the three odd symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) that form the strong chance are stopped after being pseudo-stopped. The

  When a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the first odd symbol and the three odd symbols forming the weak chance eye, the first special symbol determination relating to the prefetch target is executed, and the first special symbol Fluctuation display is started. Along with this, the hold icon related to the prefetch target that has been held in blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect is displayed as the icon without changing as it is (FIG. 75E). reference).

  At the same time as the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers constituting the odd symbols that are slightly moving in a form that forms a strong chance eye are the default colors (for example, green) Are simultaneously changed from red to red (see FIG. 75E). In addition, the icon change effect (a jackpot notice) that displays an icon change suggestion image that suggests that the icon changes to a rainbow is executed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon is changed to the rainbow icon (a jackpot notice).

  Thereafter, with the rainbow-colored icon being displayed, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at high speed and then pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 75 (F)). Informed. In addition, when it is determined to execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of starting the variable effect related to the prefetch target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before developing to the reach effect.

  In FIG. 75, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is being displayed during the chance eye display and during the symbol change effect. For this reason, in the flow of FIG. 75 compared to the flow of FIG. 74 in which the jackpot notice is not executed during these effects (that may be lost), for example, three symbols or relatively high reliability or Reach is likely to be established with 7 symbols, and the ratio of high-reliability SPSP reach is high and the ratio of jackpot is high (100% probability of jackpot).

[Modification of SPSP Reach Mode]
For example, it may be possible to display the decorative pattern of the first aspect or the decorative pattern of the second aspect during the SPSP reach (specifically during the battle effect). FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for describing an aspect of SPSP reach (battle effect). As illustrated in FIG. 76, two types of battle effects are provided in advance in SPSP reach, and these modes may be different in the form of decorative symbols displayed as reach symbols. Specifically, during the battle effect, an aspect A (see FIG. 76 (A)) in which the decorative pattern of the first aspect is displayed in three symbol rows that form a reach in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5; There is a mode B (see FIG. 76A) in which the decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed. In the big hit, the aspect B appears more easily than the aspect A, and the aspect B appears less likely than the aspect A when lost. For this reason, the reliability with respect to jackpot is higher in aspect B than in aspect A. The player can enjoy the game while expecting the battle effect to be executed in the mode B. The title display, the operation promotion effect, and the cut-in during the SPSP reach are executed when the SPSP reach is the mode B, but may not be performed when the SPSP reach is the mode A, and the appearance rate is determined. It may be lowered.

  For example, the sub-CPU 131 of the effect control board 130, when starting the change effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 in FIG. 52), changes the change pattern corresponding to the change effect started this time to D, E, I, J. If it is, it is determined which of the effect modes of mode A and mode B the battle effect is executed. The sub CPU 131 refers to, for example, a battle effect mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines the effect mode of the battle effect based on the information on whether or not the big hit and the type of the corresponding variation pattern. Determine by random lottery.

  The battle effect mode lottery table is a table in which, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the effect mode of the battle effect is determined in advance. The ratio determined by the aspect B (the number of determination values assigned to the aspect B) is higher for the jackpot than for the loss, and lower in the order of the variation pattern E> D> J> I. In addition, the ratio determined for the mode A is that the jackpot is lower than the loss and is higher in the order of the variation pattern E <D <J <I.

  In another embodiment, during the SPSP reach, one of an operation promotion effect (weak mode) for displaying a normal button image and an operation promotion effect (strong mode) for displaying a protruding button image is executed. (See FIG. 65). When the strong mode is more reliable than the weak mode and the reliability for the big hit is higher, when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed during the SPSP reach, the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed Instead, the blue cut-in may be easily displayed and the red cut-in may be difficult to display, or the blue cut-in may be difficult to be displayed and the red cut-in may be easily displayed.

Specifically, for example, the relationship of the reliability of the combination of the operation promotion effect and the cut-in may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In (1), the reliability is high when the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the cut-in effect mode, and the reliability is low when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed. The degree relationship is easy to understand.
(2) Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) .
In the above (2), there is a case where the relationship of reliability only with cut-in is reversed. As a result, when the blue cut-in is displayed, the expectation may be higher than when the red cut-in is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the blue cut-in from decreasing. is there. Further, even if the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is started, the game can be continued without losing expectation.
(3) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In the above (3), the reliability is high when the red cut-in is displayed and the reliability is low when the blue cut-in is displayed, regardless of the production mode of the operation promotion effect.
(4) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) .
In (4) above, the fall has the lowest reliability, the rise has a medium reliability, and the production modes having high reliability have the highest reliability, so the relationship between the reliability is easy to understand.
It should be noted that the relationship between the reliability levels related to the combination of the operation promotion effect and the cut-in is not limited to the above relationships (1) to (4), and may be any relationship.

[Small pattern]
In another embodiment, the variation display may be started with the variation display of the special symbol, and the “small symbol” that is stopped with the special symbol stop display may be displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, the small symbol is, for example, a symbol in a mode in which the decorative symbol of the second aspect is reduced to 1/8 size, and is composed of three small symbols, a small left symbol, a small medium symbol, and a small right symbol. .

  The small symbol notifies whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss by a combination of numbers indicated by the three small symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and the right symbol) and the middle symbol so as to be a combination for notifying the big hit, and then the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, along with the pseudo stop of the middle symbol, the small symbols (left small symbol, medium small symbol, and right small symbol) are pseudo-stopped with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol, and then the combination of the three small symbols is decorated. Stop and display the same combination of numbers as the symbol to notify the jackpot. In the event of a loss, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and right symbol) and the middle symbol so as to be a combination for reporting the loss (separate eyes or reach lose eyes), and then the combination of the three decorative symbols The display is stopped and displayed without change. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative symbols, the small symbols (left small symbol, medium small symbol, and right small symbol) are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols. For this reason, for example, when shifting to the customer waiting state, the small symbols are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols.

  Thus, the small symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display are synchronized. For this reason, the small symbol is a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol being executed, similarly to the decorative symbol.

  Note that the small symbols may be displayed in a variable manner by displaying predetermined specific combinations in order. For example, “1 ・ 3 ・ 5” → “2 ・ 4 ・ 6” → “3 ・ 5 ・ 7” → “4 ・ 6 ・ 8” → “Left small design / Medium small design / Right small design” Such a combination may be displayed in a variable manner. When a big hit is made, the small symbol is stopped in a pseudo manner with a combination of the same numbers as the decorative symbol, and then the small symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the number of symbols used as small symbols can be smaller than that of decorative symbols, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  The decorative symbol and the small symbol are common in that the variable display starts with the start of the special symbol change display and stops with the special symbol stop display.

  However, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are different in the following points. First, the decorative design is usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while the small design is displayed relatively small in the lower left of the screen, and the display mode (for example, shape, (The size, the speed of the variable display, the direction of the variable display) does not change, and the display position does not change during the changing effect.

  For example, with a special symbol's variable display, the decorative symbol slowly starts changing display or moves slightly upward and then scrolls downward, while the small symbol starts at a constant speed at a constant direction. Start high-speed fluctuation display. Note that the speed at which the small symbols are variably displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols of the first aspect and the second aspect are scrolled at a high speed, or may be the same. Moreover, it may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the 4th symbol is variably displayed, or may be the same.

  In addition, as for the decorative symbols, some of the three columns of decorative symbols may be pseudo-stopped during the special symbol variation display. On the other hand, in the small symbols, some of the three rows of small symbols do not stop in a pseudo manner. For example, when a reach effect is executed, the decorative symbol is scrolled slowly when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped (for example, an effect display in the reach establishment effect), and the right symbol is the left symbol. There is a case where the pseudo-stop is performed with the same symbol and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In addition, when the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped at the same symbol, a highly reliable reach effect (for example, SPSP reach) after the middle symbol is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle symbol is likely to stop at the reach miss. May develop. Further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-stop is performed with the symbols having different left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols.

  On the other hand, for small symbols, even if a reach establishment effect or reach effect is executed, the speed of variable display will not slow down, and the small and medium symbols will not be displayed variably while the left small symbol and right small symbol are pseudo-stopped. . Further, even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol are not pseudo-stopped. That is, even when the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped, the three rows of small symbols remain variably displayed without being pseudo-stopped.

  In addition, the decorative pattern of the first aspect is reduced and displayed as a decorative pattern of the second aspect at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of SPSP reach). In contrast, small symbols are not reduced and displayed. That is, even when the decorative symbols are reduced, the three rows of small symbols are variably displayed as they are without being reduced.

  Further, the decorative design is used for the first reflection effect, the second reflection effect, and the third reflection effect, but the small design is not used for these effects. For this reason, even when the decorative symbol that is pseudo-stopped in the big hit mode is added with highlight light, highlight light is not added to the small symbol.

  In addition, some or all of the decorative symbols may be displayed while other effect images (for example, button images) are superimposed on the front side or the effect agent 7 is operated on the near side while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. May not be visible. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed on the near side of the other effect images, and are displayed at positions that can be visually recognized even when the effect actor 7 is operated. For example, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the middle symbols of the three rows of decorative symbols may not be visible, while the small symbols of the three rows may not be partially visible. While the symbols are not visible (or not displayed), the small and medium symbols remain displayed (variable display). In other embodiments, the small symbols may not be visible when the production actor 7 is operated.

[Modified example of decorative design]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in the normal-time lose reach reach selection table (see FIG. 19A) that is referred to when the determination result of the special symbol determination is lost, 1 symbol to 6 symbols, 8 The ratios for selecting symbols and 9 symbols are set in advance to be equal to each other. In addition, in the probability change lost symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (A)), the ratio of selecting decorative symbols other than the three symbols, five symbols, and seven symbols is set in advance to be equal. Thereby, the function which suggests the reliability with respect to jackpot was able to be provided with respect to the kind of number which comprises the decoration symbol which is which number of 1-9.

  However, it was not difficult to select all odd symbols when losing than even symbols. For this reason, regardless of the type of numbers, the default color of numbers that make up odd numbers is green, and the default color of numbers that make up even numbers is blue, but this decorative design (specifically, numbers) It was not possible to have a function to suggest the reliability of the jackpot for the elements related to the color of the.

  Therefore, in order to provide a function that suggests the reliability of the elements related to the color of the decorative design, the reach design selection table for normal loss and the reach design selection table for probability change lose (FIGS. 19A and 20A). )) May be set in advance so that the selection ratio of the even symbol is higher than that of the odd symbol.

  Specifically, for example, in the reach design selection table for normal losing, among the reach design selection random numbers “0” to “99”, 9 random numbers for each of the 1 design, 5 design, and 9 design 7 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random values are assigned to 7 symbols. In addition, 15 random numbers are assigned to 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols, respectively.

  In addition, for example, in the reach design selection table for probability change lose, for example, among the reach design selection random numbers of “0” to “99”, 5 symbols each for 1 design, 3 designs, 5 designs, and 9 designs. Random numbers are assigned 0 random numbers for 7 symbols. In addition, 20 random numbers are assigned to 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols, respectively.

  By configuring the lose reach reach selection table as described above, a win can be more likely to occur when reach is established with an odd number of symbols than when reach is established with an even number of symbols. Thereby, the function which suggests the reliability with respect to jackpot can be given with respect to the element regarding the color of a decoration design (specifically number). If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, even numbers and odd numbers may be selected as the reach symbols, while the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal. An odd number design is not selected (refer to Drawing 19 (B) and (C) and Drawing 20 (B) and (C)). For this reason, the function which suggests the reliability with respect to changing to a probability change game state with respect to the element regarding the color of a decoration design can also be given. That is, for example, the SPSP reach is a jackpot expectation degree when an odd symbol (for example, 7 symbols) of a predetermined color is displayed than when an even symbol (for example, 2 symbols) other than the predetermined color is displayed. It can be said that the degree of expectation to shift to the probable gaming state is high. Note that when the reach symbol is an even symbol, the game may be lost or jackpot, and when the reach symbol is an odd symbol, it may be a jackpot.

  In addition to the above configuration of the lose reach reach selection table, the even symbols may be set in advance so that the even symbols are more easily displayed than the odd symbols. . Specifically, for example, in order to determine disjoint in the process of step S1540 in FIG. 51, the even symbol is more easily determined as a decorative symbol that forms disjoint symbols than all odd symbols. You may refer to the table. In addition, all the decorative symbols that form the broken eyes may be even numbers, or a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) is an odd symbol and other decorative symbols (for example, the right symbol) are even symbols. But you can.

  In addition, the default color (the element relating to the color of the decorative design) of the numbers constituting the decorative design is not limited to the color described above, and any color may be used. For example, the color of the numbers that make up the odd symbol may be red, and the color of the numbers that make up the even symbol may be purple.

  Further, the numbers constituting the odd number design and the numbers constituting the even number design need only be different colors, and the number symbols constituting the odd number design may have a plurality of colors, or the numbers constituting the even number design may have a plurality of colors. . Specifically, among the odd symbols, the number “7” color that constitutes the 7 symbols is red, and the color that constitutes the odd symbol other than the 7 symbols is green, the even symbol is configured. The color of the number to be displayed may be blue (that is, a color other than red and green).

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of colors may be associated with one number constituting each decorative design. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers that make up each decorative design, and the reliability for jackpots and the reliability for shifting to the probable gaming state in this order (That is, an expectation level that does not shift to the short-time gaming state) may be set in advance. For example, the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even symbol, and the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd symbol. (The jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be interested in the elements related to the color of the decorative design.

  Further, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for one number constituting each decorative design. For example, the character which is an additional display may differ for every number which comprises a decorative design, and several characters may be matched as an additional display with respect to one number. Specifically, the characters A to C which are the additional display of the seven symbols may not be the additional display of the decorative symbols indicating other numbers. For example, the reliability for the jackpot in the order of the characters A to C and the reliability for shifting to the probability changing gaming state (that is, the expectation not to shift to the short-time gaming state) may be set in advance. For example, when the reach is established with the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character B is added, the reliability is higher than when the reach is established with the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character A is added. The reliability is higher when the reach is established with the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character C is added (the jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be interested in the elements related to the additional display of the decorative symbols. Note that a plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the 1 to 9 symbols may be prepared in advance as additional display. For example, characters A to C are prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the 1 to 9 symbols. May be.

  With reference to FIG.77 and FIG.78, the modification of the decoration design of a 1st aspect and a 2nd aspect is demonstrated. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the additional display displayed by adding to the numbers constituting the decorative design. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the decorative design of the first mode and the second mode.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern of the first aspect is configured by a number and a character that is an additional display corresponding to this number, and the decorative pattern of the second aspect is by a number without additional display. Composed. In the modification described with reference to FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, any one of the additional images A to C, which is an effect image different from the character, is used as the decorative design, regardless of the decorative symbol. It is always added to the numbers that make up. The additional images A to C are additional displays superimposed on the back side of the numbers constituting the decorative symbols in any of the decorative patterns of the first aspect and the second aspect.

  Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the character that is another additional display on the back side of the number (see FIG. 78 (A)). In the decorative pattern of the second mode, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the number (see FIG. 78 (B)).

  The additional images A to C move or do not move in the same manner as the character that is the additional display. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decoration pattern of the first aspect is in a pseudo stop state and when the decoration pattern of the first aspect is changed to the decoration pattern of the second aspect (and In the opposite case), it fluctuates so as to synchronize with the fine movement of the numbers constituting the decorative design. Further, when scrolling, the additional images A to C do not fluctuate regardless of the speed. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are still images, and the additional images A to C are not moved at all as in the case of the additional display character. In another embodiment, while the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, while the additional images A to C may fluctuate.

  The additional image A is an ocher image and is an additional display corresponding to an odd symbol other than the seven symbols (see FIG. 77A). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to an even number of symbols (see FIG. 77B). The additional display C is a golden image with a different pattern from the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to 7 symbols.

  Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative design, it is possible to determine whether the number constituting the decorative design is an odd number, an even number, or “7” depending on the type of the additional image. Thus, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative design is blue compared to the case where the element related to the color of the decorative design (specifically, a number) is green and the additional image A (that is, an odd number other than 7 symbols). It can be suggested that in the case of the added image B (that is, even symbols), the reliability for the jackpot and the reliability for shifting to the probability variation gaming state are higher. In addition, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative design is green and the additional image C (that is, 7 designs), the reliability for the jackpot and the transition to the probability variation gaming state is more than in the case of other combinations. It can be suggested that the reliability is high.

  Since the additional displays A to C are attached to the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the decorative symbol of the second aspect, the additional displays A to C are always displayed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. In normal mode A and B (in normal game state) and probability change mode A and B (in probability change game state), the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are the same, and additional images A to C can be displayed. is there. Thereby, a sense of unity can be given to these different production modes.

  Note that the additional image A and the additional image B may be images of different colors, or may be images in which some of them are the same and different in other parts.

  Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number constituting the decorative design. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the additional image C is more likely to be added as the reliability for the big hit is higher, and the additional image A is easier to be added as the reliability is lower. Good. Note that the additional image C is added when it is a big hit, but may not be added when it is lost.

[Modification of reliability suggestion effect]
In another embodiment, the following effects may be executed as the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed during the display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect.

  For example, instead of the background effect, a serif effect that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot may be executed by displaying a serif image representing the serif of this character together with a predetermined character. The serif production includes a weak serif, a strong serif, and a rainbow serif that functions as a jackpot notice for definitive notice that a jackpot will be made, and the reliability for the jackpot is high in this order. For example, in response to an operation during an operation promotion effect, a weak line may be executed instead of a bird background, a strong line may be executed instead of a night background, and a rainbow line may be executed in the case of a big hit. The serif effect is different from the background effect that displays a background image with a wide display area in that a serif image with a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen is displayed.

  In addition, for example, instead of the background effect, a step-up effect is executed in which a predetermined upper limit number of steps (for example, 4) is used as an upper limit, and the step is developed and terminated step by step to any step below the upper limit step number Also good. In the step-up effect, for example, an effect display in which the effect mode changes in a plurality of stages is performed by sequentially switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance. The step-up effect is an effect that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot depending on how many steps the effect develops. A step up effect that develops up to the upper limit step functions as a jackpot notice when the number of steps that develops to a large number of steps (for example, 3) is higher than that of a case that develops to only a few steps (for example, 1). For example, a step-up effect may be executed instead of the background effect according to the operation during the operation promotion effect. The step-up effect is different from the background effect that displays a background image with a wide display area in that an effect image with a narrow display area is displayed.

  For example, the normal pseudo-continuous production may be executed only in the normal mode A, and the story pseudo-continuous production may be executed only in the normal mode B. Further, the pseudo-continuous effect, the chance eye effect, and the symbol background effect may be executable only in the normal mode A, or may be executable only in the normal mode B. Further, while the operation promotion effect (weak mode) can be executed in the normal modes A and B, the operation promotion effect (strong mode) may be executed only in the normal mode A.

  Also, depending on the value of the setting value related to the jackpot probability, the execution ratio of all the reliability suggestion effects may be varied, or the execution ratio of some reliability suggestion effects (for example, only the background effect) may be varied. Also good. For example, the execution rate of the predetermined reliability suggesting effect may be higher (or lower) in the order of the setting values “1” to “3”. As an example, if the set value is “3”, the background effect can be executed in the normal mode A, and if the set value is “2” or “1”, the background effect is not executed even in the normal mode A ( In other words, by performing the background effect, it may be suggested that the setting value is set to “3”.

  In another embodiment, the effect control board 130 performs a part of the process executed on the image sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150), or the process executed on the effect control board 130. A part of the image sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150) may be executed. In addition, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 are integrally configured, and the process executed on the effect control board 130, the process executed on the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150. The processing executed in step 1 may be executed by one control board.

  Moreover, the said embodiment is mutually applicable. For example, the present invention may be realized by a configuration in which the first embodiment, the modified example of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment are combined.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The explanatory diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other modes may be used.

  In addition, the above-described effects are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Moreover, the said embodiment and modification are mutually applicable, and this invention may be implement | achieved by various combinations.

[Configuration and operational effect of pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment may have the following configuration.

A game machine (for example, 1) according to an embodiment determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination Machine,
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Display a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variation display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, the corresponding display is a normal aspect or a special aspect in the common effect, while the notice effect can be appropriately executed depending on which aspect is in the notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute the notice effect so as to effectively stand out. Moreover, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from occurring when the display of the corresponding display and the execution of the notice effect are performed at the same time.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Selection means (for example, 100) for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern based on the result of the determination;
Production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Display a corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variation display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed,
If it is determined to execute the special game,
The second variation pattern is more easily selected than the first variation pattern.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate notice effect according to the type of variation pattern. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively prevent an effect that is felt redundant or felt excessive. In addition, when the special game is executed, more notice effects can be executed than when the special game is not executed, so that an interesting effect can be realized during the display of the corresponding display.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
The first notice effect can be executed before the start of the common effect,
The second notice effect can be executed after the common effect starts.

  According to this configuration, different effects can be executed before and after the common effect. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect with a sharp edge.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
The first notice effect can be executed before the start of the common effect,
The second notice effect can be executed after the start of the common effect,
The first notice effect is less likely to be executed after the start than the start of the common effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the performance before and after the common performance, and it can be expected that the first notice effect after the start of the common performance is executed.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
A specific effect (for example, a promotion effect) for displaying the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, a jackpot mode) after executing a common effect (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode. Is possible, and
Depending on which timing of the plurality of timings the common effect is executed at, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs.

  According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the timing at which the common performance is executed, and therefore it is possible to keep an eye on the production until the common performance is started.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
A specific effect (for example, a promotion effect) for displaying the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, a jackpot mode) after executing a common effect (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode. Is possible, and
Depending on whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display in the common effect is the special mode, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in what correspondence display is displayed in the common effect, and therefore it is possible to pay attention to the effect during the common effect.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
It is possible to execute an effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode and a second effect mode,
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
The first presentation mode (for example, the normal mode A) is controlled, and the corresponding display is any one of the normal mode (for example, the decorative pattern of the first mode) and the special mode (for example, the decorative pattern of the second mode). A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) that is executed when there is one,
A second notice effect (for example, a title) that is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is different from that during the first notice effect is controlled in the first effect mode or the second effect mode (for example, the normal mode B). Display), and
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, the type of the notice effect can be made different or the same depending on the type of the effect mode, so the sense of unity for the entire effect executed on the gaming machine is changed while changing the effect for each effect mode. Can be issued.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern based on a result of the determination;
Production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is not executed.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern based on a result of the determination;
Production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the first variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect is not executed,
When the second variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect can be executed.

  According to the above two configurations, it is possible to execute an appropriate notice effect according to the type of variation pattern. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively prevent an effect that is felt redundant or felt excessive.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode);
There is a third notice effect (for example, a hold icon change effect),
The third notice effect can be executed during execution of the first notice effect,
Do not execute the third notice effect during execution of the second notice effect,
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, since the third notice effect is not executed during the execution of the second notice effect, it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the second notice effect from being lowered by the third notice effect.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
There are a first mode (for example, a bird background) and a second mode (for example, a night background) as the mode of the first notice effect.
There are a third mode (for example, a blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, a red title display) in the production mode of the second notice effect,
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game is executed varies depending on the combination of the first and second notice effects.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the type of notice effect to be executed and its effect mode, and to draw attention to the player even when the correspondence display is a normal mode or a special mode. Is possible.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Along with the variation display of the identification information, the corresponding display corresponding to the variation display is variably displayed,
Along with the derivation display of the determination result, the correspondence display is stopped and displayed.
A re-variation effect (for example, a story pseudo-continuous effect) in which the correspondence display is temporarily stopped after the correspondence display is temporarily stopped after the change display of the correspondence display is started is displayed a predetermined number of times. Is possible,
It is possible to execute an effect suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the production suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed,
A first effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
There is a second effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
When the number of re-variation effects is small (for example, once), the first effect and the second effect can be executed,
When the number of re-variation effects is large (for example, twice), the second effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, there is a notice effect that is not executed according to the number of re-variation effects, but in such a case, since the number of re-change effects is large, it is difficult to make the player bored.

The gaming machine (for example, 1) includes input means that can be input by the player,
A game machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination,
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
When the correspondence display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode), a first notice effect (for example, a background effect) that can be executed in response to an input to the input unit;
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
There are a first mode (for example, a bird background) and a second mode (for example, a night background) as the mode of the first notice effect.
There are a third mode (for example, a blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, a red title display) in the production mode of the second notice effect,
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game is executed varies depending on the combination of the first and second notice effects.

  According to such a configuration, not only can the degree of expectation be given to the notice effect itself, but also the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the combination of a plurality of notice effects. Thereby, it is possible to be interested not only in the notice effect alone but also in a plurality of types of the notice effect when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, and it is advantageous for the player according to the fact that the identification result that can be identified is variably displayed and the result of the determination is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game)
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
The correspondence display is
A first element relating to color (for example, the color of a number constituting a decorative pattern);
A second element (for example, an additional image) to be added to the first element,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the mode of the element of the correspondence display.

  According to such a configuration, the player can be focused on the corresponding display, and as a result, the player's attention is also given to the notice effect when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode. It is possible to attract.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) determines whether or not to execute a special game, and it is advantageous for the player according to the fact that the identification result that can be identified is variably displayed and the result of the determination is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, 6R normal) or a second advantageous state (for example, 16R probability change) more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
The correspondence display is
A first element relating to color (for example, the color of a number constituting a decorative pattern);
A second element (for example, an additional image) to be added to the first element,
The case where the first element and the second element are in a specific mode (for example, the number constituting the decorative design is red and the additional image C) is more in the second advantageous state than the case where it is not a specific mode. Easy to control.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the correspondence display, and it is possible to give a special feeling to the player when the element of the correspondence display is in a specific mode.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
Suggestion effect suggesting that the special game is executed (for example, the icon change effect that changes the icon to a rainbow color),
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game is executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the second mode),
After the first notice effect, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first notice effect,
In the case where the suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the first notice effect,
In the common effect, the proportion of the corresponding display displayed in the special mode is different.

  According to this configuration, since the suggestion effect may be executed during the execution of the first notice effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention during the first notice effect. Further, since the common effect is executed after the first notice effect, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the common effect following the first notice effect.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variably manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination. And
Providing production control means (eg 130) for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings and a target effect (for example, a pre-effect),
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect (for example, a hold icon change effect) that is executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative pattern of the first mode);
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, the icon change effect),
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
When the target effect is in the first effect mode (for example, blue) in response to the execution of the first notice effect, the proportion of the target effect in the second effect mode (for example, rainbow color) is the first rate. And
When the target effect is the first effect mode in response to the execution of the second notice effect, the rate at which the target effect becomes the second effect mode is the second rate (for example, the first rate). Higher rate).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on whether the target effect has become the first effect mode by the first notice effect or the first effect by the second notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's attention both when the correspondence display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

1 gaming machine 5 liquid crystal display (liquid crystal screen)
7 Directors 13 Grand Prize 24 Speaker 100 Game Control Board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP

Claims (1)

A game machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and derives and displays the result of the determination,
Providing production control means for controlling production,
The production control means includes
Displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variation display of the identification information;
It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
In the notice effect,
A first notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode;
There is a second notice effect that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode,
It is possible to execute a common effect capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode,
The first notice effect can be executed before the start of the common effect,
A gaming machine capable of executing the second notice effect after the start of the common effect.

Images